Primary Surveillance 2D S Band Radar (Indra PSR) PDF

UM
Indra PSR
User Manual
Project: N/A
System: Indra Primary Surveillance 2D S Band Radar (Indra PSR)
Contract : N/A
Subtitle : N/A
INDRA
Name Signature Date Responsibility
Digitally signed by [F]

Alexandra Solera Paniego
Prepared Alexandra Solera Paniego Date: 2016.06.03 11:36:50 System Engineer
+02'00'
Digitally signed by [F] María Carmen Fayos
Mª Carmen Fayos Aranda Aranda
System Engineer
Revised
Date: 2016.06.03 12:20:16 +02'00'
Jesús Lozano Pacios Digitally signed by [F] Jesús Lozano Pacios

Date: 2016.06.03 13:03:51 +02'00'
Magister Sys. Engineer
Digitally signed by [F] Rosa
Rosa María Serrano María Serrano González
Approved Quality Assurance
González Date: 2016.06.03 13:20:48
+02'00'
Digitally signed by [F] Pedro
Pedro José Almoguera José Almoguera Fernández
Authorized Area Director
Fernández Date: 2016.06.03 14:37:32
+02'00'
Indra owns the copyright of this document, which is supplied confidentially and must not be used for any purpose other
than that for which it is supplied. It must not be reproduced either wholly or partially, copied or transmitted to any person
without the authorization of Indra.
Indra ▪ Ctra. de Loeches, 9 ▪ 28850 Torrejón de Ardoz ▪ Madrid ▪ Spain ▪ Tel. (+34) 916271000
Doc.Nº: 0066500000031MA00
Edit./Rev.: D/0
Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
RECORD OF EDITIONS AND PAGE REVISIONS
This document contains the following pages in the editions and revisions shown:
Chapter Edit./Rev. Chapter Edit./Rev. Chapter Edit./Rev. Chapter Edit./Rev.
i-xxviii D/0 5 D/0

1 D/0 A D/0
2 D/0
3 D/0
4 D/0
DOCUMENT CHANGES RECORD
Edit./Rev. Date Chapters Reason for Change
A/0 15/05/2014 1-5, A New Document

B/0 08/10/2014 1-5, A Updates
C/0 19/02/2015 1-5, A Updates and error corrections
D/0 29/04/2016 1-5, A Correction of images of CMS. Review of AGSU
explanation.
DISTRIBUTION SHEET
Copy Nº. Company / Organization Department Name and Surname
II Doc.Nº: 0066500000031MA00
Edit./Rev.: D/0
Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Chapter Description Page
1. INTRODUCTION .......................................................................................................................... 1-1

1.1 OBJECT .................................................................................................................................. 1-1
1.2 IDENTIFICATION .................................................................................................................... 1-1
1.3 DOCUMENT OVERVIEW ....................................................................................................... 1-2
1.4 TERMINOLOGY AND CONVENTIONS ................................................................................. 1-3
1.4.1 Meaning of Precautionary Statements ........................................................................... 1-3
1.5 SCOPE .................................................................................................................................... 1-4
1.6 SYSTEM OVERVIEW ............................................................................................................. 1-4
1.7 DOCUMENTS.......................................................................................................................... 1-5
1.7.1 Applicable Documents ..................................................................................................... 1-5
1.7.2 Reference Documents ..................................................................................................... 1-5
1.8 DEFINITIONS AND ACRONYMS ........................................................................................... 1-6
1.8.1 Definitions ......................................................................................................................... 1-6
1.8.2 Acronyms .......................................................................................................................... 1-6
2. SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ............................................................................................................. 2-1
2.1 INTRODUCTION ..................................................................................................................... 2-1
2.2 SYSTEM ARCHITECTURE .................................................................................................... 2-1
2.2.1 Antenna and Pedestal Group (APG) ............................................................................... 2-1
2.2.1.1 Antenna ......................................................................................................................... 2-3
2.2.1.1.1 BEAM SPECIFICATIONS AND PATTERNS ........................................................... 2-5
2.2.1.2 Pedestal ........................................................................................................................ 2-8
2.2.1.2.1 DRIVING MECHANISM ........................................................................................... 2-8
2.2.1.2.1.1 MOTOR ............................................................................................................... 2-9
2.2.1.2.1.2 MECHANICAL CLUTCH ..................................................................................... 2-9
2.2.1.2.1.3 GEARBOX ........................................................................................................ 2-10
2.2.1.2.2 PINION ................................................................................................................... 2-10
2.2.1.2.3 BEARING RING ..................................................................................................... 2-11
2.2.1.2.4 ANTENNA SUPPORT ............................................................................................ 2-11
2.2.1.3 Rotary Joint ................................................................................................................. 2-12
2.2.1.3.1 CHANNEL SPECIFICATIONS ............................................................................... 2-13
2.2.1.3.2 SLIP RING SPECIFICATIONS .............................................................................. 2-14
2.2.1.3.3 ENCODER SPECIFICATIONS .............................................................................. 2-15
Doc.Nº: 0066500000031MA00 III

Edit./Rev.: D/0
Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
TABLE OF CONTENTS

2.2.1.4 Waveguide Compressor Dehydrator ........................................................................... 2-15
2.2.2 Dual Rotary Control Group (DRCG/PTCP/Junction Box) ........................................... 2-18
2.2.2.1 Dependency Between DRCG and PTCP .................................................................... 2-19
2.2.2.2 Dual Rotary Control Group (DRCG) ............................................................................ 2-20
2.2.2.3 Connector Panel .......................................................................................................... 2-24
2.2.2.4 Diode Board ................................................................................................................. 2-26
2.2.2.5 Frequency Converter (Motor Controller) ..................................................................... 2-26
2.2.2.5.1 INPUTS/OUTPUTS ................................................................................................ 2-27
2.2.2.5.2 FREQUENCY CONVERTERS CONFIGURATION FOR INSTALLATION IN IT
NETWORKS ............................................................................................................................. 2-29
2.2.2.6 Safety Devices or Interlocks ........................................................................................ 2-29
2.2.2.7 Pedestal Top Control Panel (PTCP) ........................................................................... 2-32
2.2.2.7.1 BOTTOM CONNECTOR PANEL ........................................................................... 2-32
2.2.2.7.2 TOP CONNECTOR PANEL ................................................................................... 2-33
2.2.2.8 Junction Box ................................................................................................................ 2-34
2.2.2.8.1 CONNECTOR PANEL ........................................................................................... 2-34
2.2.3 Microwave Group (MWG) ............................................................................................... 2-35
2.2.3.1 Functional Description ................................................................................................. 2-37
2.2.3.1.1 LOW-TGT CHANNEL ............................................................................................. 2-38
2.2.3.1.2 HI-TGT, HI-WX AND LOW-WX CHANNELS ......................................................... 2-40
2.2.3.2 Lightning Protector ...................................................................................................... 2-42
2.2.3.3 Harmonic Filter ............................................................................................................ 2-42
2.2.3.4 Directional Couplers .................................................................................................... 2-43
2.2.3.4.1 WAVEGUIDE BI-DIRECTIONAL COUPLER ......................................................... 2-43
2.2.3.4.2 COAXIAL DIRECTIONAL COUPLER .................................................................... 2-43
2.2.3.5 Duplexer ...................................................................................................................... 2-44
2.2.3.6 Power Load.................................................................................................................. 2-45
2.2.3.7 Switches ...................................................................................................................... 2-45
2.2.3.7.1 WAVEGUIDE SWITCH .......................................................................................... 2-45
2.2.3.7.2 COAXIAL SWITCH ................................................................................................. 2-46
2.2.3.8 Receiver Protector with Programmable Attenuator Function ...................................... 2-46
2.2.3.9 Filter + LNA Unit (FLU) ................................................................................................ 2-47
2.2.3.10 Coaxial Receiver Channel (CRCH) ............................................................................. 2-48
IV Doc.Nº: 0066500000031MA00
Edit./Rev.: D/0
Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
TABLE OF CONTENTS

2.2.3.11 Shelf Switch Assembly (SSA) ..................................................................................... 2-49
2.2.4 Transmitter Group (TXG) ............................................................................................... 2-50
2.2.4.2 Transmitter Control Unit (TXCU) ................................................................................. 2-53
2.2.4.3 Pre-amplifier Panels (PRPA) ....................................................................................... 2-55
2.2.4.4 Power Amplifier Panels (PA) ....................................................................................... 2-56
2.2.4.5 Splitter/Combiner Assembly (SCA) ............................................................................. 2-57
2.2.4.6 Blowers ........................................................................................................................ 2-58
2.2.4.7 Power Supplies ........................................................................................................... 2-58
2.2.4.7.1 MULTIVOLTAGE POWER SUPPLIES (MVPS) .................................................... 2-59
2.2.4.7.2 BULK POWER SUPPLIES (BPS) .......................................................................... 2-59
2.2.4.8 Auxiliary Elements ....................................................................................................... 2-59
2.2.5 Generator Receiver and Processor Group (GRPG) .................................................... 2-61
2.2.5.2 Signal Distribution Group (SDG) ................................................................................. 2-64
2.2.5.2.1 POWER SUPPLIES ............................................................................................... 2-66
2.2.5.2.2 TURNING SIGNAL UNIT (TSU)............................................................................. 2-66
2.2.5.2.3 ENCODER SIGNALS BYPASS BOARD (ESBB) .................................................. 2-67
2.2.5.2.4 GROUP SELECTION............................................................................................. 2-67
2.2.5.2.4.1 SDG CONTROL UNIT (SDCU)......................................................................... 2-68
2.2.5.2.4.2 ACTIVE GROUPS SELECTION UNIT (AGSU) ................................................ 2-68
2.2.5.2.5 INTERMEDIATE FREQUENCY CONTROL SWITCHING UNIT (IFCSU) ............ 2-70
2.2.5.3 MicroWave Control Group (MWCG) ........................................................................... 2-70
2.2.5.3.1 RADIOFREQUENCY CONTROL SWITCHING UNIT (RFCSU) ........................... 2-72
2.2.5.3.2 MICROWAVE CONTROL UNIT (MWCU) ............................................................. 2-73
2.2.5.3.3 MICROWAVE RELAY UNIT (MWRU) ................................................................... 2-74
2.2.5.4 MWG, Polarizer and Input RF Switches Power Supply Group (MWPG) .................... 2-74
2.2.5.5 Receiver Group (RXG) ................................................................................................ 2-74
2.2.5.5.1 EPG AND RXG POWER SUPPLY ASSEMBLY (ERPS) ...................................... 2-76
2.2.5.5.2 TEST INJECTION AND STABILITY MONITORING UNIT (TISMU)...................... 2-76
2.2.5.5.3 SENSITIVITY TIME CONTROL UNIT (STCU) ...................................................... 2-77
2.2.5.5.4 RECEIVER GROUP CONTROL UNIT (RGCU) .................................................... 2-77
2.2.5.5.5 S-BAND RECEIVER UNIT (SRXU) ....................................................................... 2-79
Doc.Nº: 0066500000031MA00 V
Edit./Rev.: D/0
Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
TABLE OF CONTENTS

2.2.5.5.6 LOCAL OSCILLATORS SWITCHING AND DISTRIBUTION UNIT (LOSDU) ....... 2-80
2.2.5.6 Exciter and Processor Group (EPG) ........................................................................... 2-80
2.2.5.6.1 FREQUENCY GENERATOR GROUP (FGG) ....................................................... 2-82
2.2.5.6.1.1 STABLE OSCILLATOR (STALO) ..................................................................... 2-82
2.2.5.6.1.2 COHERENT OSCILLATOR (COHO) ................................................................ 2-83
2.2.5.6.1.3 TRANSMISSION GENERATION UNIT (TXGU) ............................................... 2-83
2.2.5.6.2 SYNCHRONIZER, CONTROL AND BIT GROUP (SCBG) .................................... 2-84
2.2.5.6.3 GENERIC PROCESSOR BOARD (GPB) .............................................................. 2-86
2.2.5.6.3.1 DIGITAL SYNTHESIZER UNIT (DSU).............................................................. 2-87
2.2.5.6.3.2 SYNCHRONIZER UNIT (SYNU) ....................................................................... 2-87
2.2.5.6.3.3 CONTROL AND BIT UNIT (CBU) ..................................................................... 2-88
2.2.5.6.4 DIGITAL DEMODULATOR AND PROCESSOR GROUP (DDPG) ....................... 2-90
2.2.5.6.4.1 Digital Receiver Unit (DRU)............................................................................... 2-90
2.2.5.6.4.2 PROCESSING SOFTWARE: SIGNAL AND DATA PROCESSING ................. 2-92
2.2.5.7 GRPG Fan Tray (GGFT) ............................................................................................. 2-93
2.2.5.8 Temperature Sensor Unit (TTSU) ............................................................................... 2-94
2.2.5.9 Central Processor Computer (CPC) ............................................................................ 2-94
2.2.5.10 Switch Router (SWR) .................................................................................................. 2-95
2.2.6 LAN Network ................................................................................................................... 2-95
2.2.7 Control and Monitoring System .................................................................................... 2-96
2.2.7.1 Local Positions ............................................................................................................ 2-97
2.2.7.2 Remote Positions ........................................................................................................ 2-98
2.2.8 Radar Communications System ................................................................................... 2-99
2.3 SYSTEM CHARACTERISTICS ........................................................................................... 2-101
3. USER INTERFACE ...................................................................................................................... 3-1
3.1 INTRODUCTION ..................................................................................................................... 3-1
3.1.1 Definitions ......................................................................................................................... 3-1
3.2 USER INTERFACE DESCRIPTION........................................................................................ 3-2
3.2.1 Top Bar .............................................................................................................................. 3-2
3.2.1.1 Acoustic Alarm ............................................................................................................... 3-2
3.2.1.2 "REPORTS" Button ....................................................................................................... 3-2
3.2.1.3 "FAULTS" Button ........................................................................................................... 3-2
3.2.1.4 Profile Area .................................................................................................................... 3-3
VI Doc.Nº: 0066500000031MA00
Edit./Rev.: D/0
Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
TABLE OF CONTENTS

3.2.1.5 Last Events Area ........................................................................................................... 3-3
3.2.1.6 Radar Site Name ........................................................................................................... 3-3
3.2.1.7 SLG Operating Mode .................................................................................................... 3-4
3.2.1.8 SLG/SRG Status ........................................................................................................... 3-4
3.2.1.9 UTC Time ...................................................................................................................... 3-4
3.2.1.10 Indra Logo ..................................................................................................................... 3-5
3.2.2 Supervision Area .............................................................................................................. 3-6
3.2.3 Control Area ...................................................................................................................... 3-7
3.3 USER INTERFACE OPERATION........................................................................................... 3-8
3.3.1 RCMS HMI Operation ....................................................................................................... 3-8
3.3.1.1 RCMS General Screen.................................................................................................. 3-8
3.3.1.2 Radar Site Screen from RCMS ..................................................................................... 3-9
3.3.1.3 Subsystem Screen from RCMS .................................................................................. 3-10
3.3.2 LCMS HMI Operation ...................................................................................................... 3-12
3.3.2.1 Site Screen from LCMS............................................................................................... 3-12
3.3.2.2 Systems Screens from SLG ........................................................................................ 3-13
3.3.3 User Access .................................................................................................................... 3-14
3.3.4 Site Systems ................................................................................................................... 3-17
3.3.4.1 Indra PSR System ....................................................................................................... 3-18
3.3.4.1.1 PSR SUPERVISION AREA ................................................................................... 3-18
3.3.4.1.1.1 TXG ................................................................................................................... 3-21
3.3.4.1.1.2 MWG ................................................................................................................. 3-25
3.3.4.1.1.3 GRPG ................................................................................................................ 3-26
3.3.4.1.1.4 SDG .................................................................................................................. 3-26
3.3.4.1.1.5 MWCG .............................................................................................................. 3-27
3.3.4.1.1.6 RXG .................................................................................................................. 3-28
3.3.4.1.1.7 EPG ................................................................................................................... 3-29
3.3.4.1.1.8 CPC ................................................................................................................... 3-30
3.3.4.1.1.9 WCD.................................................................................................................. 3-31
3.3.4.1.2 PSR CONTROL AREA .......................................................................................... 3-31
3.3.4.1.2.1 GENERAL ......................................................................................................... 3-32
3.3.4.1.2.1.1 Transmission ................................................................................................ 3-32
3.3.4.1.2.1.2 Azimuth Adjustment ..................................................................................... 3-33
Doc.Nº: 0066500000031MA00 VII

Edit./Rev.: D/0
Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
TABLE OF CONTENTS

3.3.4.1.2.1.3 Operation...................................................................................................... 3-33
3.3.4.1.2.1.4 Clear Day Map Generation .......................................................................... 3-34
3.3.4.1.2.1.5 Active Chain ................................................................................................. 3-35
3.3.4.1.2.1.6 PSR Data Output ......................................................................................... 3-36
3.3.4.1.2.1.7 Temperature Values ..................................................................................... 3-37
3.3.4.1.2.1.8 SIC/SAC Values ........................................................................................... 3-37
3.3.4.1.2.2 TXG TAB ........................................................................................................... 3-38
3.3.4.1.2.3 PROCESSING PARAMETERS TAB ................................................................ 3-38
3.3.4.1.2.4 TEST INJECTION ............................................................................................. 3-43
3.3.4.1.2.4.1 Test Type ..................................................................................................... 3-43
3.3.4.1.2.4.2 Injection Control ........................................................................................... 3-44
3.3.4.1.2.5 PERMANENT ECHOES TAB............................................................................ 3-48
3.3.4.1.2.6 DP REPORT TAB ............................................................................................. 3-49
3.3.4.1.2.7 SP REPORTS TAB ........................................................................................... 3-49
3.3.4.1.2.7.1 Noise Level (dBq) ......................................................................................... 3-50
3.3.4.1.2.7.2 FI Test Relative Level (dB)........................................................................... 3-50
3.3.4.1.2.7.3 RF Test Relative Level (dB) ......................................................................... 3-51
3.3.4.1.2.7.4 TX MON Relative Level (dB) ........................................................................ 3-52
3.3.4.1.2.7.5 FI Test Stability (dB) ..................................................................................... 3-52
3.3.4.1.2.7.6 RF Test Stability (dB) ................................................................................... 3-53
3.3.4.1.2.7.7 TX MON Stability (dB) .................................................................................. 3-53
3.3.4.1.2.7.8 TX Monitoring Point ...................................................................................... 3-54
3.3.4.1.2.7.9 TXG/MWG Measurements ........................................................................... 3-54
3.3.4.1.2.8 MAPS APPLICATION TAB ............................................................................... 3-55
3.3.4.2 Pedestal ....................................................................................................................... 3-56
3.3.4.2.1 TOP BAR ................................................................................................................ 3-57
3.3.4.2.2 PEDESTAL SUPERVISION AREA ........................................................................ 3-57
3.3.4.2.2.1 SYSTEM STATUS ............................................................................................ 3-58
3.3.4.2.2.2 ENCODER STATUS ......................................................................................... 3-59
3.3.4.2.2.3 CONTROL MODE ............................................................................................. 3-59
3.3.4.2.2.4 INTERLOCK CHAIN .......................................................................................... 3-60
3.3.4.2.2.5 DRIVE STATUS ................................................................................................ 3-60
3.3.4.2.2.6 MOTOR STATUS .............................................................................................. 3-61
VIII Doc.Nº: 0066500000031MA00

Edit./Rev.: D/0
Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
TABLE OF CONTENTS

3.3.4.2.2.7 CLUTCH STATUS ............................................................................................ 3-61
3.3.4.2.2.8 SUMP STATUS................................................................................................. 3-62
3.3.4.2.2.9 OBSTRUCTION LIGHTS .................................................................................. 3-62
3.3.4.2.2.10 ANTENNA TURNING STATUS ........................................................................ 3-62
3.3.4.2.2.11 CMS MAIN SCREEN BUTTON ........................................................................ 3-62
3.3.4.2.3 PEDESTAL CONTROL AREA ............................................................................... 3-63
3.3.4.3 NTP Server System..................................................................................................... 3-64
3.3.4.4 PPI Radar Data Display .............................................................................................. 3-72
3.3.4.4.1 OPERATOR INPUTS ............................................................................................. 3-74
3.3.4.4.2 GENERAL ACTIONS ON WINDOW ...................................................................... 3-74
3.3.4.4.3 UPPER BAR AREA................................................................................................ 3-75
3.3.4.4.3.1 RETURN ........................................................................................................... 3-76
3.3.4.4.3.2 FILTER .............................................................................................................. 3-76
3.3.4.4.3.3 RANGE ............................................................................................................. 3-77
3.3.4.4.3.4 MAPS ................................................................................................................ 3-78
3.3.4.4.3.5 VIEW ................................................................................................................. 3-78
3.3.4.4.3.6 OPTIONS .......................................................................................................... 3-79
3.3.4.4.3.7 VERSION .......................................................................................................... 3-80
3.3.4.4.3.8 TIME .................................................................................................................. 3-80
3.3.4.4.3.9 RADAR NAME INDICATIVE AREA .................................................................. 3-80
3.3.4.4.3.10 GENERAL STATUS SLG, SLG/SRG ............................................................... 3-81
3.3.4.4.4 LOWER ZONE BUTTONS ..................................................................................... 3-81
3.3.4.4.4.1 CURSOR COORDINATES ............................................................................... 3-81
3.3.4.4.5 LINE AZIMUTH DISTANCE ................................................................................... 3-82
3.3.4.4.6 ANTENNA ANGLE ................................................................................................. 3-82
3.3.4.4.7 TIME ....................................................................................................................... 3-82
3.3.4.4.8 PLOTS.................................................................................................................... 3-83
3.3.4.4.9 TRACKS ................................................................................................................. 3-83
3.3.4.4.10 DATA DISPLAY AREA........................................................................................... 3-83
3.3.4.5 Control and Monitoring System Configuration ............................................................ 3-86
3.3.4.5.1 SLG CONFIGURATOR .......................................................................................... 3-87
3.3.4.5.1.1 MENU BAR ....................................................................................................... 3-88
3.3.4.5.1.2 GENERAL BUTTONS ....................................................................................... 3-91
Doc.Nº: 0066500000031MA00 IX
Edit./Rev.: D/0
Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
TABLE OF CONTENTS

3.3.4.5.1.3 GENERAL TAB ................................................................................................. 3-91
3.3.4.5.1.4 COMMUNICATIONS TAB ................................................................................. 3-93
3.3.4.5.2 SRG CONFIGURATOR ......................................................................................... 3-95
3.3.4.5.2.1 MENU ................................................................................................................ 3-95
3.3.4.5.2.2 GENERAL BUTTONS ....................................................................................... 3-95
3.3.4.5.3 SRG GENERAL TAB.............................................................................................. 3-96
3.3.4.5.3.1 SITES TAB ........................................................................................................ 3-98
3.3.4.6 Reports Manager ....................................................................................................... 3-100
3.3.4.7 Radar Communication System .................................................................................. 3-109
3.3.4.7.1 TOP BAR .............................................................................................................. 3-110
3.3.4.7.2 SUPERVISION AREA .......................................................................................... 3-111
3.3.4.7.2.1 ASTERIX TRAFFIC DELAYS.......................................................................... 3-113
3.3.4.7.2.2 SLG MAIN SCREEN ....................................................................................... 3-113
3.3.4.7.2.3 SYSTEM MONITORING ................................................................................. 3-114
3.3.4.7.3 CONTROL AREA ................................................................................................. 3-115
3.3.4.7.3.1 GENERAL ....................................................................................................... 3-116
3.3.4.7.3.2 FLOWS ............................................................................................................ 3-117
3.3.4.7.3.2.1 SDCS Selection ......................................................................................... 3-117
3.3.4.7.3.2.2 Mode Selection........................................................................................... 3-118
3.3.4.7.3.2.3 Flow Configuration ..................................................................................... 3-118
3.3.4.7.3.2.3.1 Delete and Modify One Flow ................................................................. 3-118
3.3.4.7.3.2.3.2 Create a New flow ................................................................................. 3-119
3.3.4.7.3.2.3.3 Input/Output Configuration .................................................................... 3-120
3.3.4.7.3.3 INTERFACES LAN .......................................................................................... 3-121
3.3.4.7.3.3.1 SDCS Selection ......................................................................................... 3-121
3.3.4.7.3.3.2 IP Configuration ......................................................................................... 3-122
3.3.4.7.3.4 Serial Interface ................................................................................................ 3-122
3.3.4.7.3.4.1 SDCS Selection ......................................................................................... 3-123
3.3.4.7.3.4.2 Serial Line Configuration ............................................................................ 3-123
3.3.4.7.3.4.2.1 HDLC Serial Line .................................................................................. 3-123
3.3.4.7.3.4.2.2 X.25 Serial Line ..................................................................................... 3-124
3.3.4.7.3.4.2.2.1 X.25 Parameters .............................................................................. 3-125
3.3.4.7.3.5 STATISTICS .................................................................................................... 3-127
X Doc.Nº: 0066500000031MA00
Edit./Rev.: D/0
Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
TABLE OF CONTENTS

3.3.4.7.3.5.1 SDCS Selection and Flow Selection.......................................................... 3-128
3.3.4.7.3.5.2 Statistics Monitoring ................................................................................... 3-129
3.3.4.7.3.6 AST STATISTICS ........................................................................................... 3-130
3.3.4.7.3.6.1 SDCS Selection ......................................................................................... 3-130
3.3.4.7.3.6.2 ASTERIX Category selection ..................................................................... 3-131
3.3.4.7.3.6.3 ASTERIX Statistics Monitoring .................................................................. 3-131
3.3.4.7.3.6.4 Thresholds Delays ..................................................................................... 3-132
3.3.4.7.3.7 SDCS VERSIONS........................................................................................... 3-133
4. SYSTEM OPERATION................................................................................................................. 4-1
4.1 INTRODUCTION ..................................................................................................................... 4-1
4.2 CONTROLS AND INDICATORS ............................................................................................ 4-1
4.2.1 Indra PSR .......................................................................................................................... 4-1
4.2.1.1 Controls and Indicators of TXG ..................................................................................... 4-1
4.2.1.1.1 CONTROLS AND INDICATORS ON THE FRONT DOOR ..................................... 4-1
4.2.1.1.2 INDICATORS OF TXCU .......................................................................................... 4-2
4.2.1.1.3 CONTROLS AND INDICATORS OF BPS ............................................................... 4-2
4.2.1.1.4 Controls and Indicators of MVPS ............................................................................. 4-3
4.2.1.2 Controls and Indicators of GRPG .................................................................................. 4-4
4.2.1.2.1 CONTROLS AND INDICATORS ON THE FRONT DOOR ..................................... 4-4
4.2.1.2.2 CONTROLS AND INDICATORS OF THE SDG ...................................................... 4-4
4.2.1.2.2.1 CONTROLS AND INDICATORS OF THE POWER SUPPLIES ........................ 4-4
4.2.1.2.2.2 INDICATORS OF TSU ........................................................................................ 4-5
4.2.1.2.2.3 INDICATORS OF SDCU ..................................................................................... 4-5
4.2.1.2.2.4 CONTROLS AND INDICATORS OF AGSU ....................................................... 4-6
4.2.1.2.3 CONTROLS AND INDICATORS OF MWCG .......................................................... 4-6
4.2.1.2.3.1 CONTROLS AND INDICATORS OF THE POWER SUPPLIES ........................ 4-6
4.2.1.2.3.2 INDICATORS OF MWCU ................................................................................... 4-6
4.2.1.2.4 CONTROLS AND INDICATORS OF MWPS ........................................................... 4-8
4.2.1.2.5 CONTROLS AND INDICATORS OF THE RXG ...................................................... 4-8
4.2.1.2.5.1 CONTROLS AND INDICATORS OF ERPS ....................................................... 4-8
4.2.1.2.5.2 CONTROLS AND INDICATORS OF RGCU ...................................................... 4-9
4.2.1.2.6 CONTROLS AND INDICATORS OF EPG............................................................. 4-10
4.2.1.2.6.1 CONTROLS AND INDICATORS OF ERPS ..................................................... 4-10
Doc.Nº: 0066500000031MA00 XI
Edit./Rev.: D/0
Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
TABLE OF CONTENTS

4.2.1.2.6.2 INDICATORS OF GPB...................................................................................... 4-10
4.2.1.2.6.3 INDICATORS OF SYNU ................................................................................... 4-10
4.2.1.2.6.4 INDICATORS CBU ............................................................................................ 4-11
4.2.1.2.6.5 INDICATORS OF STALO ................................................................................. 4-11
4.2.1.2.6.6 CONTROLS AND INDICATORS OF COHO..................................................... 4-12
4.2.1.3 Controls and Indicators of DRCG/PTCP ..................................................................... 4-13
4.2.2 Other Components Not Included in this Manual ......................................................... 4-16
4.3 OPERATING PROCEDURES ............................................................................................... 4-17
4.3.1 General Safety Conditions ............................................................................................. 4-17
4.3.2 User Access to the Control and Monitoring System .................................................. 4-18
4.3.3 System Power Up ........................................................................................................... 4-20
4.3.3.1 Indra PSR Power Up ................................................................................................... 4-21
4.3.3.2 CMS Power Up Procedure .......................................................................................... 4-22
4.3.3.3 Antenna Drive System Power Up ................................................................................ 4-23
4.3.3.4 SDCS Power Up Procedure ........................................................................................ 4-25
4.3.3.5 LAN Switches Power Up Procedure ............................................................................ 4-26
4.3.4 System Power Down ...................................................................................................... 4-27
4.3.4.1 Indra PSR Power Down ............................................................................................... 4-28
4.3.4.2 CMS Power Down Procedure...................................................................................... 4-29
4.3.4.3 CMS Reboot Procedure .............................................................................................. 4-30
4.3.4.4 Antenna Drive System Power Down ........................................................................... 4-31
4.3.4.5 SDCS Power Down Procedure.................................................................................... 4-33
4.3.4.6 Initial configuration for LAN Switches .......................................................................... 4-34
4.3.4.7 LAN Switches Power Down Procedure ....................................................................... 4-35
4.3.5 Emergency Stop ............................................................................................................. 4-36
4.3.6 Signal Distribution Group (SDG) Operation ................................................................. 4-38
4.4 MANAGEMENT PROCEDURES .......................................................................................... 4-40
4.4.1 Adding a New User ......................................................................................................... 4-40
4.4.2 Removing a Registered User ......................................................................................... 4-42
4.4.3 Changing the Properties of a Registered User ............................................................ 4-43
4.4.4 Unlocking User ............................................................................................................... 4-45
4.4.5 Report Generation (Alarms and User Actions) ............................................................ 4-46
4.4.6 Basic System Configuration Procedure ....................................................................... 4-47
XII Doc.Nº: 0066500000031MA00

Edit./Rev.: D/0
Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
TABLE OF CONTENTS

4.4.6.1 Antenna and Pedestal Group Configuration in Maintenance Mode ............................ 4-47
4.4.6.2 Initial Configuration for LAN Switches ......................................................................... 4-48
4.4.6.3 Configuration Via USB of the SDCS Modules ............................................................ 4-49
5. QUICK INDEX PROCEDURES .................................................................................................... 5-1
A. RECEIVER PROTECTOR SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS ................................................................ A-2
No se encontraron elementos de tabla de contenido.
Doc.Nº: 0066500000031MA00 XIII

Edit./Rev.: D/0
Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
FIGURES INDEX
Description Page
Figure 2.2.1-1. APG Diagram ................................................................................................................................ 2-2

Figure 2.2.1-2. APG Installation, with a Co-Mounted MSSR Antenna................................................................... 2-2
Figure 2.2.1-3. APG Diagram ................................................................................................................................ 2-3
Figure 2.2.1.1-1. Diagram of the Antenna Elements ............................................................................................. 2-4
Figure 2.2.1.1.1-1. Elevation Pattern (Low Beam in Red Colour, Blue Line is Minimum Goal) ............................. 2-6
Figure 2.2.1.1.1-2. Elevation Pattern Showing Low Beam in Red, High Beam in Deep Blue................................ 2-6
Figure 2.2.1.1.1-3. Azimuth Pattern ...................................................................................................................... 2-7
Figure 2.2.1.2-1. Pedestal Diagram ...................................................................................................................... 2-8
Figure 2.2.1.2.1.1-1. Electric Motor ....................................................................................................................... 2-9
Figure 2.2.1.2.1.2-1. Clutch ................................................................................................................................... 2-9
Figure 2.2.1.2.1.3-1. Gearbox ............................................................................................................................. 2-10
Figure 2.2.1.2.2-1. Axial Pin Coupling ................................................................................................................. 2-10
Figure 2.2.1.2.3-1. Bearing Ring ......................................................................................................................... 2-11
Figure 2.2.1.2.4-1. Antenna Support ................................................................................................................... 2-11
Figure 2.2.1.3-1. Rotary Joint Physical Diagram ................................................................................................. 2-12
Figure 2.2.1.3.3-1. Encoder Unit ......................................................................................................................... 2-15
Figure 2.2.1.4-1. MT050B Dehydrator ................................................................................................................. 2-15
Figure 2.2.1.4-2. Dehydrator Elements ............................................................................................................... 2-16
Figure 2.2.1.4-3. External Regulator ................................................................................................................... 2-16
Figure 2.2.1.4-4. Alarms Connections ................................................................................................................. 2-17
Figure 2.2.2-1. Block Diagram DRCG/PTCP/Junction Box ................................................................................. 2-18
Figure 2.2.2.1-1. DRCG and PTCP Control ........................................................................................................ 2-19
Figure 2.2.2.2-1. DRCG Internal View with Locators........................................................................................... 2-21
Figure 2.2.2.3-1. Connector Panel ...................................................................................................................... 2-24
Figure 2.2.2.4-1. Diode Board ............................................................................................................................. 2-26
Figure 2.2.2.5-1. Frequency Converter ............................................................................................................... 2-27
Figure 2.2.2.5.2-1. Screws Location .................................................................................................................... 2-29
Figure 2.2.2.6-1. Locking Mechanism ................................................................................................................. 2-29
Figure 2.2.2.6-2. Pedestal Interlock Chain Elements .......................................................................................... 2-30
Figure 2.2.2.6-3. Safety Module .......................................................................................................................... 2-31
Figure 2.2.2.6-4. Contactor ................................................................................................................................. 2-31
Figure 2.2.2.7-1. Internal View of PTCP .............................................................................................................. 2-32
Figure 2.2.2.7.1-1. Bottom Connector Panel of PTCP ........................................................................................ 2-32
Figure 2.2.2.7.2-1. Top Connector Panel for PTCP ............................................................................................ 2-33
XIV Doc.Nº: 0066500000031MA00

Edit./Rev.: D/0
Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
FIGURES INDEX
Description Page
Figure 2.2.2.8-1. Internal View of Junction Box .................................................................................................. 2-34
Figure 2.2.2.8.1-1. Connector Panel of Junction Box.......................................................................................... 2-34
Figure 2.2.3-1. MWG Physical Configuration ...................................................................................................... 2-36
Figure 2.2.3-2. MWG Physical Diagram .............................................................................................................. 2-36
Figure 2.2.3.1-1. Functional Diagram of the MWG.............................................................................................. 2-37
Figure 2.2.3.1.1-1. Conceptual Model of the LOW-TGT Channel ....................................................................... 2-38
Figure 2.2.3.1.1-2. LOW-TGT to Transmit and Receive ..................................................................................... 2-38
Figure 2.2.3.1.1-3. Elements of the LOW-TGT Channel ..................................................................................... 2-39
Figure 2.2.3.1.1-4. Signals Monitored in MWG ................................................................................................... 2-40
Figure 2.2.3.1.2-1. Conceptual Model of the HI-TGT, HI-WX and LOW-WX Channel ........................................ 2-41
Figure 2.2.3.1.2-2. Elements of the HI-TGT Channel, and WX Channels ........................................................... 2-41
Figure 2.2.3.2-1. Lightning Protectors in the MWG ............................................................................................. 2-42
Figure 2.2.3.3-1. Harmonic Filter of the MWG .................................................................................................... 2-42
Figure 2.2.3.4.1-1. Bi-directional Couplers of the MWG...................................................................................... 2-43
Figure 2.2.3.4.2-1. Coaxial Directional Couplers in the MWG............................................................................. 2-43
Figure 2.2.3.5-1. Functional Diagram of the Duplexer ........................................................................................ 2-44
Figure 2.2.3.5-2. Duplexer in the MWG .............................................................................................................. 2-44
Figure 2.2.3.6-1. Power Load in the MWG......................................................................................................... 2-45
Figure 2.2.3.7.1-1. Waveguide Switch in the MWG ............................................................................................ 2-45
Figure 2.2.3.7.2-1. Coaxial Switches in the MWG............................................................................................... 2-46
Figure 2.2.3.8-1. Receiver Protector with Programmable Attenuator Function in the MWG ............................... 2-46
Figure 2.2.3.9-1. FLUs in the MWG .................................................................................................................... 2-47
Figure 2.2.3.10-1. Coaxial Receiver Channel in the MWG ................................................................................. 2-48
Figure 2.2.3.11-1. Conceptual Model of the Test Signal Injection Assembly ...................................................... 2-49
Figure 2.2.3.11-2. Test Shelf Switch Assembly in the MWG............................................................................... 2-49
Figure 2.2.4-1. TXG Physical Internal Diagram: Front (10 PA configuration)...................................................... 2-50
Figure 2.2.4-2. Physical Diagram: Back (10 PA configuration) ........................................................................... 2-51
Figure 2.2.4.1-1. Amplification Chain (10 PA configuration) ............................................................................... 2-52
Figure 2.2.4.1-2. TXG Block Diagram ................................................................................................................. 2-52
Figure 2.2.4.2-1. TXG Control Board .................................................................................................................. 2-54
Figure 2.2.4.3-1. TXG Pre-Amplifier Panels ........................................................................................................ 2-55
Figure 2.2.4.4-1. TXG Amplifier Panels .............................................................................................................. 2-56
Figure 2.2.4.5-1. TXG Splitter/Combiner Assembly (10 PA configuration).......................................................... 2-57
Figure 2.2.4.6-1. TXG Blowers............................................................................................................................ 2-58
Figure 2.2.4.7-1. TXG Power Supplies ............................................................................................................... 2-58
Doc.Nº: 0066500000031MA00 XV
Edit./Rev.: D/0
Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
FIGURES INDEX
Description Page
Figure 2.2.4.8-1. MWG Auxiliary Elements ......................................................................................................... 2-60
Figure 2.2.5-1. GRPG Elements ......................................................................................................................... 2-61
Figure 2.2.5.1-1. System Block Diagram ............................................................................................................. 2-62
Figure 2.2.5.1-2. GRPG Connections ................................................................................................................. 2-63
Figure 2.2.5.2-1. Image of the Elements of the SDG .......................................................................................... 2-65
Figure 2.2.5.2-2. Block Diagram of the SDG ....................................................................................................... 2-65
Figure 2.2.5.2.1-1. 5V, -15V and 15V Power Supplies ........................................................................................ 2-66
Figure 2.2.5.2.2-1. TSU Units.............................................................................................................................. 2-66
Figure 2.2.5.2.4-1. SDG Block Diagram Showing SDCU and AGSU Interconnections ....................................... 2-67
Figure 2.2.5.2.4.1-1. SDCU Unit ......................................................................................................................... 2-68
Figure 2.2.5.2.4.2-1. AGSU Unit ......................................................................................................................... 2-68
Figure 2.2.5.2.5-1. IFCSU Unit ............................................................................................................................ 2-70
Figure 2.2.5.3-1. Image of the MWCG Elements ................................................................................................ 2-71
Figure 2.2.5.3-2. Block Diagram of the MWCG ................................................................................................... 2-71
Figure 2.2.5.3.1-1. RFCSU Unit .......................................................................................................................... 2-72
Figure 2.2.5.3.1-2. RFCSU Logic Diagram for Each Beam ................................................................................. 2-72
Figure 2.2.5.3-3. MWCU Interconnection Diagram ............................................................................................. 2-73
Figure 2.2.5.4-1. MWPG ..................................................................................................................................... 2-74
Figure 2.2.5.5-1. Image of the RXG Elements .................................................................................................... 2-75
Figure 2.2.5.5-2. RXG Logic Diagram ................................................................................................................. 2-75
Figure 2.2.5.5.1-1. ERPS .................................................................................................................................... 2-76
Figure 2.2.5.5.2-1. TISMU front Side Connectors ............................................................................................... 2-76
Figure 2.2.5.5.3-1. STCU Unit ............................................................................................................................. 2-77
Figure 2.2.5.5.4-1. RGCU Interconnection Diagram ........................................................................................... 2-78
Figure 2.2.5.5.5-1. SRXU Unit............................................................................................................................. 2-79
Figure 2.2.5.5.6-1. LOSDU Module Configuration............................................................................................... 2-80
Figure 2.2.5.6-1. EPG Units Distribution ............................................................................................................. 2-81
Figure 2.2.5.6-2. Logic Diagram of the EPG ....................................................................................................... 2-81
Figure 2.2.5.6.1-1. Transmitted Spectrum ........................................................................................................... 2-82
Figure 2.2.5.6.1.1-1. STALO Unit ........................................................................................................................ 2-82
Figure 2.2.5.6.1.2-1. COHO Unit ......................................................................................................................... 2-83
Figure 2.2.5.6.1.3-1. Generated Waveform ......................................................................................................... 2-83
Figure 2.2.5.6.1.3-2. TXGU Unit.......................................................................................................................... 2-84
Figure 2.2.5.6.2-1. System Control and Synchronism Signals ............................................................................ 2-85
Figure 2.2.5.6.3-1. GPB Front ............................................................................................................................. 2-86
XVI Doc.Nº: 0066500000031MA00

Edit./Rev.: D/0
Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
FIGURES INDEX
Description Page
Figure 2.2.5.6.3.2-1. SYNU Unit ......................................................................................................................... 2-87
Figure 2.2.5.6.3.3-1. CBU Interconnection Diagram ........................................................................................... 2-89
Figure 2.2.5.6.3.3-2. CBU Unit ............................................................................................................................ 2-89
Figure 2.2.5.6.4-1. Three GPB Units of the DDPG ............................................................................................. 2-90
Figure 2.2.5.6.4.1-1. DDC Block Diagram ........................................................................................................... 2-91
Figure 2.2.5.6.4.1-2. DSU Location and Connectors Configuration .................................................................... 2-91
Figure 2.2.5.6.4.2-1. Round Robin Architecture and Communication between Elements................................... 2-92
Figure 2.2.5.7-1. Fan Tray Location in GRPG .................................................................................................... 2-93
Figure 2.2.5.7-2. Fan Tray Located at GRPG Back ............................................................................................ 2-93
Figure 2.2.5.8-1. TTSU Located Behind the Fan Tray ........................................................................................ 2-94
Figure 2.2.5.10-1. Switch Router and its Position on the Rack ........................................................................... 2-95
Figure 2.2.6-1. LAN Network Distribution............................................................................................................ 2-95
Figure 2.2.7-1. Communication Architecture....................................................................................................... 2-96
Figure 2.2.7.1-1. Access to Screen (SLG) .......................................................................................................... 2-97
Figure 2.2.7.2-1. Access to Several Screens (SRG) .......................................................................................... 2-98
Figure 2.2.7.2-2. Access from SRG to SLG ........................................................................................................ 2-98
Figure 2.2.8-1. SDCS System ............................................................................................................................. 2-99
Figure 2.2.8-2. SDCS Connector ...................................................................................................................... 2-100
Figure 2.2.8-3. Data flows in the SDCS within a Radar System Via LAN ......................................................... 2-100
Figure 3.2.1-1. Top Bar Example .......................................................................................................................... 3-2
Figure 3.2.1.1-1. Acoustic Alarm Button ............................................................................................................... 3-2
Figure 3.2.1.2-1. Report Button............................................................................................................................. 3-2
Figure 3.2.1.3-1. Faults Button.............................................................................................................................. 3-2
Figure 3.2.1.4-1. Profile Section............................................................................................................................ 3-3
Figure 3.2.1.5-1. Last Events Area ....................................................................................................................... 3-3
Figure 3.2.1.5-2. Top Bar LB Menu ....................................................................................................................... 3-3
Figure 3.2.1.6-1. Radar Site Name ....................................................................................................................... 3-3
Figure 3.2.1.7-1. SLG Operation Mode ................................................................................................................. 3-4
Figure 3.2.1.8-1. SLG Status ................................................................................................................................ 3-4
Figure 3.2.1.8-2. SRG Status ................................................................................................................................ 3-4
Figure 3.2.1.8-3. SLG/SRG Status........................................................................................................................ 3-4
Figure 3.2.1.9-1. UTC Time .................................................................................................................................. 3-4
Figure 3.2.1.10-1. Indra Logo ............................................................................................................................... 3-5
Figure 3.2.1.10-2. System SW Versions SLG ....................................................................................................... 3-5
Figure 3.2.1.10-3. System SW Versions SRG ...................................................................................................... 3-5
Doc.Nº: 0066500000031MA00 XVII

Edit./Rev.: D/0
Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
FIGURES INDEX
Description Page
Figure 3.2.2-1. Supervision Area ........................................................................................................................... 3-6
Figure 3.2.3-1. Example of Control Area ............................................................................................................... 3-7
Figure 3.3.1.1-1. Top Bar - SRG Main Screen ...................................................................................................... 3-8
Figure 3.3.1.1-2. SRG Main Screen ...................................................................................................................... 3-8
Figure 3.3.1.1-3. Radar Site Status from SRG ...................................................................................................... 3-8
Figure 3.3.1.2-1. Top Bar of Site in SRG............................................................................................................... 3-9
Figure 3.3.1.2-2. Central Area of Site in SRG ....................................................................................................... 3-9
Figure 3.3.1.2-3. SLG Status from SLG .............................................................................................................. 3-10
Figure 3.3.1.3-1. Top Bar of Subsystem in SRG ................................................................................................. 3-10
Figure 3.3.1.3-2. Supervision Area of Subsystem ............................................................................................... 3-10
Figure 3.3.1.3-3. Updating Subsystem from SRG ............................................................................................... 3-11
Figure 3.3.1.3-4. Example of Control Area .......................................................................................................... 3-11
Figure 3.3.2.1-1. Top Bar of Main Screen in SLG ............................................................................................... 3-12
Figure 3.3.2.1-2. Central Area of Site in SLG ...................................................................................................... 3-12
Figure 3.3.2.2-1. Top Bar of System in SLG ....................................................................................................... 3-13
Figure 3.3.2.2-2. Supervision Area of System ..................................................................................................... 3-13
Figure 3.3.2.2-3. Example of Control Area .......................................................................................................... 3-13
Figure 3.3.3-1. Users in SLG............................................................................................................................... 3-14
Figure 3.3.3-2. Remaining time for password expiration ..................................................................................... 3-15
Figure 3.3.3-3. Wrong User/Password ................................................................................................................ 3-15
Figure 3.3.3-4. Locked by number of attempts .................................................................................................... 3-16
Figure 3.3.3-5. Users from SRG .......................................................................................................................... 3-16
Figure 3.3.4-1. General Radar Site View............................................................................................................. 3-17
Figure 3.3.4.1-1. Access to Indra PSR System ................................................................................................... 3-18
Figure 3.3.4.1.1-1. PSR Supervision Area .......................................................................................................... 3-18
Figure 3.3.4.1.1-2. TXG....................................................................................................................................... 3-18
Figure 3.3.4.1.1-3. GRPG with all the Subgroups of Both Channels ................................................................... 3-19
Figure 3.3.4.1.1-4. MWG and its Redundant Channels ....................................................................................... 3-19
Figure 3.3.4.1.1-5. WCD ..................................................................................................................................... 3-19
Figure 3.3.4.1.1-6. Transmission Status: Correct ................................................................................................ 3-19
Figure 3.3.4.1.1-7. Transmission Status: No Transmission ................................................................................. 3-19
Figure 3.3.4.1.1-8. Transmission Status: No Generation and No Transmission.................................................. 3-20
Figure 3.3.4.1.1-9. Polarization Status ................................................................................................................ 3-20
Figure 3.3.4.1.1-10. GRPG to LANs .................................................................................................................... 3-20
Figure 3.3.4.1.1-11. LAN1 and LAN2 Status ....................................................................................................... 3-20
XVIII Doc.Nº: 0066500000031MA00

Edit./Rev.: D/0
Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
FIGURES INDEX
Description Page
Figure 3.3.4.1.1-12. Data Output Status ............................................................................................................. 3-21
Figure 3.3.4.1.1-13. Encoder Status ................................................................................................................... 3-21
Figure 3.3.4.1.1.1-1. TXG Block Diagram (10 PA configuration) ........................................................................ 3-22
Figura 3.3.4.1.1.1-2. TXG Block Diagram (12 PA configuration) ........................................................................ 3-22
Figure 3.3.4.1.1.1-3. PRPA Block Diagram (Main).............................................................................................. 3-23
Figure 3.3.4.1.1.1-4. PRPA Block Diagram (Standby) ........................................................................................ 3-23
Figure 3.3.4.1.1.1-5. PA Block Diagram .............................................................................................................. 3-24
Figure 3.3.4.1.1.2-1. MWG Block Diagram ......................................................................................................... 3-25
Figure 3.3.4.1.1.4-1. SDG Block Diagram ........................................................................................................... 3-26
Figure 3.3.4.1.1.5-1. MWCG Block Diagram ....................................................................................................... 3-27
Figure 3.3.4.1.1.6-1. RXG Block Diagram ........................................................................................................... 3-28
Figure 3.3.4.1.1.7-1. EPG Block Diagram ........................................................................................................... 3-29
Figure 3.3.4.1.1.8-1. CPC Block Diagram ........................................................................................................... 3-30
Figure 3.3.4.1.1.9-1. WCD Block Diagram .......................................................................................................... 3-31
Figure 3.3.4.1.2-1. Control Area.......................................................................................................................... 3-31
Figure 3.3.4.1.2.1-1. General Tab ....................................................................................................................... 3-32
Figure 3.3.4.1.2.1.1-1. Transmission Enable ...................................................................................................... 3-32
Figure 3.3.4.1.2.1.2-1. Azimuth Adjustment ........................................................................................................ 3-33
Figure 3.3.4.1.2.1.3-1. Operation Parameters .................................................................................................... 3-34
Figure 3.3.4.1.2.1.4-1. Clear Day Map Generation ............................................................................................. 3-34
Figure 3.3.4.1.2.1.5-1. Active Chain Selection .................................................................................................... 3-35
Figure 3.3.4.1.2.1.6-1. PSR Data Output Selection ............................................................................................ 3-36
Figure 3.3.4.1.2.1.7-1. Temperature Values ....................................................................................................... 3-37
Figure 3.3.4.1.2.1.8-1. SIC/SAC Display............................................................................................................. 3-37
Figure 3.3.4.1.2.2-1. TXG Tab for 10 PAs configuration ..................................................................................... 3-38
Figura 3.3.4.1.2.2-2. TXG Tab for 12 PAs configuration ..................................................................................... 3-38
Figure 3.3.4.1.2.3-1. Processing Parameters Tab .............................................................................................. 3-38
Figure 3.3.4.1.2.3-2. Sensitivity........................................................................................................................... 3-39
Figure 3.3.4.1.2.3-3. Effective Refraction............................................................................................................ 3-39
Figure 3.3.4.1.2.3-4. Range Offset...................................................................................................................... 3-40
Figure 3.3.4.1.2.3-5. Tracking Activation ............................................................................................................ 3-40
Figure 3.3.4.1.2.3-6. Smooth Plot Position. ........................................................................................................ 3-41
Figure 3.3.4.1.2.3-7. ASTERIX Output Category ................................................................................................ 3-41
Figure 3.3.4.1.2.3-8. Linear to Circular ............................................................................................................... 3-42
Figure 3.3.4.1.2.3-9. Circular to Linear ............................................................................................................... 3-42
Doc.Nº: 0066500000031MA00 XIX

Edit./Rev.: D/0
Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
FIGURES INDEX
Description Page
Figure 3.3.4.1.2.4-1. Test Injection Tab............................................................................................................... 3-43
Figure 3.3.4.1.2.4.1-1. Test Type Selection: Analog Test Targets Selected ....................................................... 3-43
Figure 3.3.4.1.2.4.1-2. Test Type Selection: Digital Test Target Selected .......................................................... 3-43
Figure 3.3.4.1.2.4.2-1. Injection Control .............................................................................................................. 3-44
Figure 3.3.4.1.2.4.2-2. Injection Type .................................................................................................................. 3-44
Figure 3.3.4.1.2.4.2-3. Injection Mode ................................................................................................................. 3-45
Figure 3.3.4.1.2.4.2-4. Injection Point ................................................................................................................. 3-45
Figure 3.3.4.1.2.4.2-5. Ring Injection .................................................................................................................. 3-46
Figure 3.3.4.1.2.4.2-6. Initial and Final Azimuth .................................................................................................. 3-46
Figure 3.3.4.1.2.4.2-7. Frequency Generator Level ............................................................................................ 3-47
Figure 3.3.4.1.2.4.2-8. Injection Range and End Range ..................................................................................... 3-47
Figure 3.3.4.1.2.4.2-9. Radial Doppler (Speed)................................................................................................... 3-48
Figure 3.3.4.1.2.5-1. Permanent Echoes Tab ..................................................................................................... 3-48
Figure 3.3.4.1.2.6-1. DP Report Tab ................................................................................................................... 3-49
Figure 3.3.4.1.2.7-1. Reports Tab ....................................................................................................................... 3-49
Figure 3.3.4.1.2.7-2. Reports Tab: Standby Chain .............................................................................................. 3-50
Figure 3.3.4.1.2.7.1-1. Noise Level ..................................................................................................................... 3-50
Figure 3.3.4.1.2.7.2-1. FI Test Relative Level ..................................................................................................... 3-51
Figure 3.3.4.1.2.7.3-1. RF Test Relative Level .................................................................................................... 3-51
Figure 3.3.4.1.2.7.4-1. Tx Mon Relative Level..................................................................................................... 3-52
Figure 3.3.4.1.2.7.5-1 FI Test Stability ................................................................................................................ 3-52
Figure 3.3.4.1.2.7.6-1. RF Test Stability .............................................................................................................. 3-53
Figure 3.3.4.1.2.7.7-1. Tx Mon Stability............................................................................................................... 3-53
Figure 3.3.4.1.2.7.8-1. Tx Monitoring Point ......................................................................................................... 3-54
Figure 3.3.4.1.2.7.9-1. TXG/MWG Measurements .............................................................................................. 3-55
Figure 3.3.4.1.2.8-1. Maps Application Tab......................................................................................................... 3-55
Figure 3.3.4.2-1. Access to Pedestal Subsystem ................................................................................................ 3-56
Figure 3.3.4.2-2. Pedestal User Interface............................................................................................................ 3-56
Figure 3.3.4.2.2-1. Supervision Area of Pedestal ................................................................................................ 3-57
Figure 3.3.4.2.2.4-1. Interlock Chain in Normal Operation .................................................................................. 3-60
Figure 3.3.4.2.2.4-2. Interlock Chain Open Example .......................................................................................... 3-60
Figure 3.3.4.2.2.4-3. Interlock Chain in Normal Operation with Hatch ................................................................ 3-60
Figure 3.3.4.2.2.6-1. Possible Motor States ........................................................................................................ 3-61
Figure 3.3.4.2.3-1. Pedestal Control Area ........................................................................................................... 3-63
Figura 3.3.4.2.3-2. Confirmation window ............................................................................................................. 3-63
XX Doc.Nº: 0066500000031MA00
Edit./Rev.: D/0
Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
FIGURES INDEX
Description Page
Figura 3.3.4.2.3-3. Confirmation window ............................................................................................................ 3-64
Figure 3.3.4.3-1. Keys and Display on the Front Panel....................................................................................... 3-64
Figure 3.3.4.3-2. NTP Configuration Tree ........................................................................................................... 3-65
Figure 3.3.4.3-3. Access to Remote Switch Configuration .................................................................................. 3-67
Figure 3.3.4.3-4. NTP Server Screen.................................................................................................................. 3-67
Figure 3.3.4.3-5. NTP Webserver Logging Access ............................................................................................. 3-67
Figure 3.3.4.3-6. Lantime Configuration Utility Area ........................................................................................... 3-68
Figure 3.3.4.3-7. Ethernet Configuration Area .................................................................................................... 3-68
Figure 3.3.4.3-8. Notification Management Area................................................................................................. 3-69
Figure 3.3.4.3-9. Security Management Area ..................................................................................................... 3-69
Figure 3.3.4.3-10. NTP Area ............................................................................................................................... 3-70
Figure 3.3.4.3-11. Local Configuration Area ....................................................................................................... 3-70
Figure 3.3.4.3-12. Statistics Area ........................................................................................................................ 3-71
Figure 3.3.4.4-1. PPI Application ........................................................................................................................ 3-72
Figure 3.3.4.4-2. Upper Area Bar (CMS) ............................................................................................................ 3-72
Figure 3.3.4.4-3. Upper Area Bar (SRG)............................................................................................................. 3-72
Figure 3.3.4.4-4. PPI Central Area ...................................................................................................................... 3-73
Figure 3.3.4.4-5. Lower Bar Area ........................................................................................................................ 3-73
Figure 3.3.4.4.1-1. Examples of Data Selection Windows .................................................................................. 3-74
Figure 3.3.4.4.3-1. Upper Bar Area (SLG) .......................................................................................................... 3-76
Figure 3.3.4.4.3-2. Upper Bar Area (SRG) .......................................................................................................... 3-76
Figure 3.3.4.4.3-3. Upper Bar Personalization .................................................................................................... 3-76
Figure 3.3.4.4.3.1-1. Return Buttons Access ...................................................................................................... 3-76
Figure 3.3.4.4.3.2-1. “Label Filter” and “Radar Data Filter” Windows Access ..................................................... 3-76
Figure 3.3.4.4.3.2-2. “Label Filter” and “Radar Data Filter” Windows.................................................................. 3-76
Figure 3.3.4.4.3.3-1. Scope Button Access......................................................................................................... 3-77
Figure 3.3.4.4.3.4-1. Maps Button Access .......................................................................................................... 3-78
Figure 3.3.4.4.3.4-2. Geo Reference Map .......................................................................................................... 3-78
Figure 3.3.4.4.3.5-1. Control Scans Access Window .......................................................................................... 3-78
Figure 3.3.4.4.3.5-2. Scans Control Window ...................................................................................................... 3-78
Figure 3.3.4.4.3.6-1. Sweeping ........................................................................................................................... 3-79
Figure 3.3.4.4.3.6-2. LAN1 Operative ................................................................................................................. 3-79
Figure 3.3.4.4.3.6-3. Options Menu Access ........................................................................................................ 3-79
Figure 3.3.4.4.3.7-1. Access Window Version .................................................................................................... 3-80
Figure 3.3.4.4.3.7-2. Version Window ................................................................................................................. 3-80
Doc.Nº: 0066500000031MA00 XXI

Edit./Rev.: D/0
Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
FIGURES INDEX
Description Page
Figure 3.3.4.4.3.8-1. UTC and Local Time .......................................................................................................... 3-80
Figure 3.3.4.4.3.9-1. Radar Name Indicative Area .............................................................................................. 3-80
Figure 3.3.4.4.3.10-1. Indicative Zone of CMS General State ............................................................................. 3-81
Figure 3.3.4.4.3.10-2. Indicative Zone of CMS/SRG General State .................................................................... 3-81
Figure 3.3.4.4.4.1-1. Cursor ................................................................................................................................ 3-81
Figure 3.3.4.4.5-1. LAD on PPI Presentation ...................................................................................................... 3-82
Figure 3.3.4.4.5-2. LAD Information .................................................................................................................... 3-82
Figure 3.3.4.4.6-1. Radar Antenna Period........................................................................................................... 3-82
Figure 3.3.4.4.7-1. Current UTC System ............................................................................................................. 3-82
Figure 3.3.4.4.8-1. PLOTS Number .................................................................................................................... 3-83
Figure 3.3.4.4.9-1. TRACKS Number.................................................................................................................. 3-83
Figure 3.3.4.4.10-1. Data Display Area ............................................................................................................... 3-83
Figure 3.3.4.4.10-2. "Label Filter" Window .......................................................................................................... 3-84
Figure 3.3.4.4.10-3. "Data Filter" Window ........................................................................................................... 3-84
Figure 3.3.4.4.10-4. Selected Plot ....................................................................................................................... 3-85
Figure 3.3.4.4.10-5. Selected Plot Information .................................................................................................... 3-85
Figure 3.3.4.5-1. Top Bar LB Menu ..................................................................................................................... 3-86
Figure 3.3.4.5-2. Log-in Window ......................................................................................................................... 3-86
Figure 3.3.4.5.1-1. SLG Configurator .................................................................................................................. 3-87
Figure 3.3.4.5.1.1-1. Configurator Apply changes ............................................................................................... 3-88
Figure 3.3.4.5.1.1-2. Configurator Revert changes ............................................................................................. 3-88
Figure 3.3.4.5.1.1-3. Save Configuration to USB Option..................................................................................... 3-89
Figure 3.3.4.5.1.1-4. Save Configuration to USB Window................................................................................... 3-89
Figure 3.3.4.5.1.1-5. Load Configuration from USB ............................................................................................ 3-89
Figure 3.3.4.5.1.1-6. Load Configuration from USB Window............................................................................... 3-90
Figure 3.3.4.5.1.1-7. Configurator Apply Changes .............................................................................................. 3-90
Figure 3.3.4.5.1.1-8. Configurator. Help .............................................................................................................. 3-90
Figure 3.3.4.5.1.2-1. Configurator SLG. Common Buttons ................................................................................. 3-91
Figure 3.3.4.5.1.3-1. Configurator SLG. General Tab ......................................................................................... 3-91
Figure 3.3.4.5.1.3-2. Configurator SLG. General Tab. Management System General Data .............................. 3-92
Figure 3.3.4.5.1.3-3. Configurator SLG. General Tab. Management Subsystem ................................................ 3-92
Figure 3.3.4.5.1.3-4. Configurator SLG. General Tab. User Management .......................................................... 3-93
Figure 3.3.4.5.1.4-1. Configurator SLG. Communications Tab ........................................................................... 3-93
Figure 3.3.4.5.1.4-2. Configurator. Communications. SLGs IP Addresses ......................................................... 3-94
Figure 3.3.4.5.1.4-3. Configurator. Communications. Internal Management ....................................................... 3-94
XXII Doc.Nº: 0066500000031MA00

Edit./Rev.: D/0
Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
FIGURES INDEX
Description Page
Figure 3.3.4.5.1.4-4. Configurator. Communications. External Management ..................................................... 3-94
Figure 3.3.4.5.2-1. SRG Configurator ................................................................................................................. 3-95
Figure 3.3.4.5.3-1. SRG General Tab ................................................................................................................. 3-96
Figure 3.3.4.5.3-2. Configurator. General SRG Tab. Options ............................................................................. 3-96
Figure 3.3.4.5.3-3. Configurator. General SRG Tab. Route List ......................................................................... 3-97
Figure 3.3.4.5.3-4. Configurator. General SRG Tab. User Management ............................................................ 3-97
Figure 3.3.4.5.3.1-1. Configurator. Sites Tab ...................................................................................................... 3-98
Figure 3.3.4.5.3.1-2. Configurator. Sites Tab. Site .............................................................................................. 3-99
Figure 3.3.4.5.3.1-3. Configurator. Sites Tab. Communications ......................................................................... 3-99
Figure 3.3.4.6-1. "Reports" button..................................................................................................................... 3-100
Figure 3.3.4.6-2. SLG Reports Manager Window ............................................................................................. 3-101
Figure 3.3.4.6-3. Reports manager - Top information Zone .............................................................................. 3-101
Figure 3.3.4.6-4. Reports Manager - Central Zone ........................................................................................... 3-102
Figure 3.3.4.6-5. Reports Manager - Central Zone tabs ................................................................................... 3-102
Figure 3.3.4.6-6. Reports Manager - Central Zone Files area .......................................................................... 3-103
Figure 3.3.4.6-7. Reports Manager - Open Report button ................................................................................ 3-103
Figure 3.3.4.6-8. Reports Manager - Copy Report button ................................................................................. 3-103
Figure 3.3.4.6-9. Copy Report - USB Copy window .......................................................................................... 3-103
Figure 3.3.4.6-10. Reports Manager - Delete Report button ............................................................................. 3-104
Figure 3.3.4.6-11. Delete Report - Confirmation window .................................................................................. 3-104
Figure 3.3.4.6-12. Reports Manager - Rename Report button.......................................................................... 3-104
Figure 3.3.4.6-13. Rename Report - New name window .................................................................................. 3-104
Figure 3.3.4.6-14. Reports Manager - New Report button ................................................................................ 3-104
Figure 3.3.4.6-15. New Report Window ............................................................................................................ 3-105
Figure 3.3.4.6-16. New Report - Report Type Section ...................................................................................... 3-106
Figure 3.3.4.6-17. New Report - Report Type and Alarm Type section ............................................................ 3-106
Figure 3.3.4.6-18. New Report - User Actions Selection................................................................................... 3-106
Figure 3.3.4.6-19. New Report - Application / Equipment ................................................................................. 3-107
Figure 3.3.4.6-20. New Report - Time Period .................................................................................................. 3-107
Figure 3.3.4.6-21. New Report - Time interval area .......................................................................................... 3-108
Figure 3.3.4.6-22. New Report - Calendar for Interval area .............................................................................. 3-108
Figure 3.3.4.6-23. New Report - Output file area .............................................................................................. 3-108
Figure 3.3.4.6-24. New Report - Clean button .................................................................................................. 3-108
Figure 3.3.4.6-25. New Report - Generate and Cancel buttons ........................................................................ 3-109
Figure 3.3.4.7-1. Access to Radar Communication System.............................................................................. 3-109
Doc.Nº: 0066500000031MA00 XXIII

Edit./Rev.: D/0
Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
FIGURES INDEX
Description Page
Figure 3.3.4.7-2. General Screen ...................................................................................................................... 3-110
Figure 3.3.4.7.1-1. Top Bar ............................................................................................................................... 3-110
Figure 3.3.4.7.2-1. External LAN Architecture ................................................................................................... 3-111
Figure 3.3.4.7.2-2. Supervision Area with Serial Architecture ........................................................................... 3-111
Figure 3.3.4.7.2.1-1. ASTERIX Delays in LAN Configuration ............................................................................ 3-113
Figure 3.3.4.7.2.1-2. ASTERIX Delays in Serial Line Configuration .................................................................. 3-113
Figure 3.3.4.7.2.2-1. SLG Main Screen ............................................................................................................. 3-113
Figure 3.3.4.7.2.3-1. Supervision Area with External LAN Configuration .......................................................... 3-114
Figure 3.3.4.7.2.3-2. Supervision Area with Serial Architecture ........................................................................ 3-114
Figure 3.3.4.7.3-1. Tabs .................................................................................................................................... 3-115
Figure 3.3.4.7.3.1-1. General ............................................................................................................................ 3-116
Figure 3.3.4.7.3.2-1. Flows................................................................................................................................ 3-117
Figure 3.3.4.7.3.2.1-1. SDCS Selection for LAN Architecture ........................................................................... 3-117
Figure 3.3.4.7.3.2.1-2. SDCS Selection for Serial Line Architecture ................................................................. 3-117
Figure 3.3.4.7.3.2.2-1. Mode Selection ............................................................................................................. 3-118
Figure 3.3.4.7.3.2.3-1. Flow Configuration ........................................................................................................ 3-118
Figure 3.3.4.7.3.2.3.1-1. Delete and Modify ...................................................................................................... 3-118
Figure 3.3.4.7.3.2.3.1-2. Detailed Values for One Input .................................................................................... 3-119
Figure 3.3.4.7.3.3-1. Network Interfaces ........................................................................................................... 3-121
Figure 3.3.4.7.3.3.1-1. SDCS Selection for LAN Configuration ......................................................................... 3-121
Figure 3.3.4.7.3.3.2-1. IP Configuration ............................................................................................................ 3-122
Figure 3.3.4.7.3.3.2-2. SDCS Partner IP Address ............................................................................................. 3-122
Figure 3.3.4.7.3.4-1. Serial Interface ................................................................................................................. 3-122
Figure 3.3.4.7.3.4.2.1-1. HDLC Serial Line Configuration ................................................................................. 3-123
Figure 3.3.4.7.3.4.2.2-1. X.25 Serial Line Configuration ................................................................................... 3-124
Figure 3.3.4.7.3.4.2.2.1-1. X.25 Parameters ..................................................................................................... 3-125
Figure 3.3.4.7.3.4.2.2.1-2. X.25 Interface .......................................................................................................... 3-125
Figure 3.3.4.7.3.4.2.2.1-3. Virtual Channels ...................................................................................................... 3-127
Figure 3.3.4.7.3.5-1. Statistics........................................................................................................................... 3-127
Figure 3.3.4.7.3.5.1-1. SDCS and Flow Selection for LAN Configuration ......................................................... 3-128
Figure 3.3.4.7.3.5.1-2. SDCS and Flow Selection for Serial Line Configuration................................................ 3-128
Figure 3.3.4.7.3.5.2-1. Statistics Monitoring ...................................................................................................... 3-129
Figure 3.3.4.7.3.6-1. ASTERIX Statistics .......................................................................................................... 3-130
XXIV Doc.Nº: 0066500000031MA00

Edit./Rev.: D/0
Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
FIGURES INDEX
Description Page
Figure 3.3.4.7.3.6.1-1. SDCS Selection for LAN Architecture ........................................................................... 3-130
Figure 3.3.4.7.3.6.2-1. ASTERIX Categories .................................................................................................... 3-131
Figure 3.3.4.7.3.6.3-1. ASTERIX Statistics ....................................................................................................... 3-131
Figure 3.3.4.7.3.6.4-1. ASTERIX Alarms Thresholds........................................................................................ 3-132
Figure 3.3.4.7.3.7-1. SDCS Versions Controls and Indicators .......................................................................... 3-133
Figure 4.2.1.1.1-1. Indicators and Controls at the Door ........................................................................................ 4-1
Figure 4.2.1.1.2-1. TXCU Indicators ..................................................................................................................... 4-2
Figure 4.2.1.1.3-1. BPS Front View ...................................................................................................................... 4-2
Figure 4.2.1.1.4-1. MVPS Front View ................................................................................................................... 4-3
Figure 4.2.1.2.1-1. Controls and Indicators of the GRPG ..................................................................................... 4-4
Figure 4.2.1.2.2.1-1. Power Supplies Indicators ................................................................................................... 4-4
Figure 4.2.1.2.2.2-1. TSU Indicators ..................................................................................................................... 4-5
Figure 4.2.1.2.2.3-1. SDCU Indicators .................................................................................................................. 4-5
Figure 4.2.1.2.2.4-1. AGSU Frontal Panel ............................................................................................................ 4-6
Figure 4.2.1.2.3.2-1. MWCU Indicators................................................................................................................. 4-7
Figure 4.2.1.2.4-1. MWPG Indicators and Controls .............................................................................................. 4-8
Figure 4.2.1.2.5.1-1. ERPS Indicators .................................................................................................................. 4-8
Figure 4.2.1.2.5.2-1. RGCU Indicators.................................................................................................................. 4-9
Figure 4.2.1.2.6.2-1. GPB Indicators................................................................................................................... 4-10
Figure 4.2.1.2.6.3-1. SYNU Indicators ................................................................................................................ 4-10
Figure 4.2.1.2.6.4-1. CBU Indicators................................................................................................................... 4-11
Figure 4.2.1.2.6.5-1. STALO Indicators .............................................................................................................. 4-11
Figure 4.2.1.2.6.6-1. COHO Indicators ............................................................................................................... 4-12
Figure 4.2.1.3-1. External View of DRCG ........................................................................................................... 4-13
Figure 4.2.1.3-2. External View of PTCP ............................................................................................................ 4-15
Doc.Nº: 0066500000031MA00 XXV

Edit./Rev.: D/0
Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
TABLES INDEX
Description Page
Table 1.7.2-1. Reference Documents ................................................................................................................... 1-5

Table 2.2.1.1-1. General Specifications of the Antenna ........................................................................................ 2-4
Table 2.2.1.1.1-1. Beam Specifications ................................................................................................................. 2-5
Table 2.2.1.1.1-2. Summary of Mechanical Characteristics .................................................................................. 2-7
Table 2.2.1.3-1. Summary of Main Channel Features ......................................................................................... 2-12
Table 2.2.1.3.1-1. Detailed Specifications of Rotary Joint Channels ................................................................... 2-13
Table 2.2.1.3.2-1. Slip Rings AC/DC Signals ...................................................................................................... 2-14
Table 2.2.1.4-1. Dehydrator Specifications ......................................................................................................... 2-17
Table 2.2.2.2-1. DRCG List of Components ........................................................................................................ 2-22
Table 2.3-1. Indra PSR Characteristics Summary............................................................................................. 2-101
Table 3.1.1-1. Users Types ................................................................................................................................... 3-1
Table 3.3.4.2.2-1. Graphical Elements ................................................................................................................ 3-58
Table 3.3.4.2.2.1-1. System Status ..................................................................................................................... 3-58
Table 3.3.4.2.2.2-1. Encoder Status.................................................................................................................... 3-59
Table 3.3.4.2.2.3-1. Control Mode ....................................................................................................................... 3-59
Table 3.3.4.2.2.5-1. Drive Status......................................................................................................................... 3-60
Table 3.3.4.2.2.7-1. Clutch Status ....................................................................................................................... 3-61
Table 3.3.4.2.2.8-1. Sump Status........................................................................................................................ 3-62
Table 3.3.4.2.2.9-1. Obstruction Lights ............................................................................................................... 3-62
Table 3.3.4.2.2.10-1. Antenna Turning Status..................................................................................................... 3-62
Table 3.3.4.7.3.1-1. General ............................................................................................................................. 3-116
Table 3.3.4.7.3.2.3.3-1. Detailed Values of a Flow............................................................................................ 3-120
Table 3.3.4.7.3.4.2.1-1. Configuration Values for HDLC Serial Lines ............................................................... 3-124
Table 3.3.4.7.3.4.2.2-1. Configuration Values for X.25 Serial Lines .................................................................. 3-125
Table 3.3.4.7.3.4.2.2.1-1. Interface X.25 Parameters ....................................................................................... 3-126
Table 3.3.4.7.3.4.2.2.1-2. Virtual Channel Parameters ..................................................................................... 3-127
Table 3.3.4.7.3.5.2-1. Statistics Monitoring ....................................................................................................... 3-129
Table 4.2.1.3-1. List of Components of DRCG Front Panel ................................................................................ 4-14
Table 4.2.1.3-2. List of Components of PTCP Front Panel ................................................................................. 4-16
Task 4.3.2-1. User Access to the Control and Monitoring System ...................................................................... 4-18
Task 4.3.3-1. System Power Up .......................................................................................................................... 4-20
Table 4.3.3.1-1. Indra PSR Power Up Procedure ............................................................................................... 4-21
Table 4.3.3.2-1. CMS Power Up Procedure ........................................................................................................ 4-22
Table 4.3.3.3-1. Antenna Drive System Power Up .............................................................................................. 4-23
XXVI Doc.Nº: 0066500000031MA00

Edit./Rev.: D/0
Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
TABLES INDEX
Description Page
Table 4.3.3.4-1. SDCS Power Up Procedure...................................................................................................... 4-25
Table 4.3.3.5-1. LAN Switches Power Up Procedure ......................................................................................... 4-26
Task 4.3.4-1. System Power Down ..................................................................................................................... 4-27
Table 4.3.4.1-1. Indra PSR Power Down procedure ........................................................................................... 4-28
Table 4.3.4.2-1. CMS Power Down procedure.................................................................................................... 4-29
Table 4.3.4.3-1. CMS Reboot Procedure ............................................................................................................ 4-30
Table 4.3.4.4-1. Antenna Drive System Power Down ......................................................................................... 4-31
Table 4.3.4.5-1. SDCS Power Down procedure.................................................................................................. 4-33
Task 4.3.4.6-1. Initial Configuration for LAN Switches ........................................................................................ 4-34
Table 4.3.4.7-1. LAN Switches Power Down Procedure ..................................................................................... 4-35
Task 4.3.5-1. Emergency Stop............................................................................................................................ 4-36
Tabla 4.3.6-1. SDG Operation ............................................................................................................................ 4-38
Task 4.4.1-1. Adding a New User ....................................................................................................................... 4-40
Task 4.4.2-1. Removing a Registered User ........................................................................................................ 4-42
Task 4.4.3-1. Changing the Properties of a Registered User.............................................................................. 4-43
Task 4.4.4-1. Unlocking User .............................................................................................................................. 4-45
Task 4.4.5-1. Report Generation (Alarms and User Actions) .............................................................................. 4-46
Task 4.4.6.1-1. Antenna and Pedestal Group Configuration in Maintenance Mode............................................ 4-47
Task 4.4.6.2-1. Initial Configuration for LAN Switches ........................................................................................ 4-48
Task 4.4.6.3-1. Configuration via USB of the SDCS Modules ............................................................................ 4-49
Table 5-1. Procedure List...................................................................................................................................... 5-1
Doc.Nº: 0066500000031MA00 XXVII

Edit./Rev.: D/0
Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
"This page intentionally left blank"
XXVIII Doc.Nº: 0066500000031MA00

Edit./Rev.: D/0
Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
1. INTRODUCTION
1.1 OBJECT
This document is the User Manual (UM) of the Indra Primary Surveillance 2D S Band Radar (Indra
PSR). The purpose of this document is to provide all needed information for the Indra Primary
Surveillance 2D S Band Radar operation.
This manual includes the system description, its operation and the user interface, mainly the Control
and Monitoring System.
1.2 IDENTIFICATION
Document Name: User Manual.

Program Name: N/A.
ACRO Program: N/A.
Project Name: N/A.
ACRO Project N/A.
CM Baseline Project: N/A.
System Name: Indra Primary Surveillance 2D S Band Radar.

ACRO System: Indra PSR.
CM Baseline System BLPSR_01.00.
Document Type: UM.

Document Code: 0066500000031MA00.
Documental Group Manual.
Prepared by the Dept. of: System Engineering (SE).

Purpose of Distrib.: Baseline.
Tools Used: Word 2007.
Document Version: D/0.

Document Date: 29/04/2016.
Doc.Nº: 0066500000031MA00 Chapter 1

Edit./Rev.: D/0 Page 1 of 12
Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
1.3 DOCUMENT OVERVIEW
The document is composed of five chapters:

 Chapter 1, INTRODUCTION, contains:
 OBJECT, describes the purpose of this document.
 IDENTIFICATION, shows the document identification items.
 DOCUMENT OVERVIEW, is this paragraph.
 TERMINOLOGY AND CONVENTIONS, contains the descriptions about terminology and
conventions used in this document.
 SCOPE, describes the scope of this document.
 SYSTEM OVERVIEW, presents an overview of the System referred to in this document.
 DOCUMENTS, provides the identification of those documents that apply to the present
document or have served as reference for its preparation.
 DEFINITIONS AND ACRONYMS, contains the technical terms, definitions and acronyms
used in this document.
 Chapter 2, SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, includes the description of the system architecture and the
main functionalities and characteristics of the system.
 Chapter 3, USER INTERFACE, includes the description of the system user interface: HMI,
controls and indicators.
 Chapter 4, SYSTEM OPERATION, describes the configuration and operation of the system and
all subsystems, including the user operating procedures related to each component or
functionality described.
 Chapter 5, PROCEDURES INDEX, contains the list of procedures applicable to the system,
subsystems and functionalities with reference to the paragraph where each procedure is
described.
 Appendix A, Receiver Protector Safety Instructions, contains the Receiver Protector MSDS.
Chapter 1 Doc.Nº: 0066500000031MA00

Page 2 of 12 Edit./Rev.: D/0
Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
1.4 TERMINOLOGY AND CONVENTIONS
Safety Conditions: they warn of the security conditions necessary to perform a task safely.
1.4.1 Meaning of Precautionary Statements
 WARNING: Indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in minor or moderate
personal injury risk.
WARNING
Safety harness required when climbing ladder and when

working in height.
 CAUTION: Indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in property damage.
CAUTION
Mechanical safety interlocks must be used when required and

observed in order to prevent accidents.
 NOTICE or CAUTION without the safety alert symbol: Is used to address practices not related
to personal injury.
NOTICE
When the supply is disabled (using the switch at the front panel), the /DC_OK
indicator will flash instead of going off. The supply is not producing DC voltage but
does not have a fault either.
CAUTION
To ensure safety and avoid mechanical accidents, the following instructions should
be followed:
 Motion radar areas must be clear and well delimited.
 Motion Radar areas must never be accessed during antenna turning.

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
1.5 SCOPE
 Program Name: N/A.

 ACRO Program: N/A.
 Project Name: N/A.

 ACRO Project: N/A.
 Contract: N/A.
 System Name: Indra Primary Surveillance 2D S Band Radar.

 ACRO System: Indra PSR.
 System Root Code: 00665.
1.6 SYSTEM OVERVIEW
The PSR system is a two-dimensional (range and azimuth) primary radar, with full solid-state
technology, and S-Band operation (2.7-2.9 GHz). The system shows a coverage of 60, 80 or 100 NM,
depending on the antenna turning speed.
The main function is to provide civil air traffic surveillance through aircraft detection, and also
surveillance under ground and weather clutter conditions, interferences and ground traffic in the
specified range. Indra PSR is ready to operate together with a MSSR system (or S Mode) with its
antenna co-mounted and sharing an integrated control and monitoring system, communications and
radar status integral management system.
The main system components are:
 Antenna and Pedestal Group (APG): It includes Antenna, Pedestal and Rotary Joint. Radiates
RF signal and receives echoes in 360º by means of the rotating system. It is possible to install a
co-mounted SSR antenna.
 Transmitter Group (TXG): It is used to amplify the RF signal in order to be transmitted. All its
main components are redundant.
 Microwave Group (MWG): It is the transmission/reception path that connects the TXG to the
APG, and also the APG to the GRPG.
 Generator, Receiver and Processor Group (GRPG): It is composed of different redundant
groups with the following main functionalities:
 Generate the transmitted signal, convert it into RF and send it to the TXG for amplification.
 Receive the echo of the transmitted signal and convert it to intermediate frequency.
 Convert the IF signal into Baseband digitally and process it to obtain target and weather
information independently.
 Send data information (ASTERIX) via LAN, through a switch-router.
This is a fully redundant system, except for the APG. However, it is redundant in the critical units such
as motors and encoders.

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
The redundancy in the receiver channels is performed at functional group level, allowing the
interconnection of different functional groups from both channels.
Other components of the system are:
 Control and Monitoring System (CMS): It is used for the user to configure, control and monitor
the whole Radar System and Site from local and remote positions.
 Communications Infrastructure: It is used to interconnect all site devices, to send the formatted
radar data to the ACCs, and to provide the link between local and remote CMS positions.
1.7 DOCUMENTS
1.7.1 Applicable Documents
N/A.
1.7.2 Reference Documents
This section details the documents used as reference for writing this document.
Table 1.7.2-1. Reference Documents
REF. DESCRIPTION CODE - EDITION / REVISION
[1] System Requirement Specification (SRS) 0066500000001ES00 - C / 0
[2] System Architecture and Requirements Allocation Description (SARAD) 0066500000011ES00 - C / 0
[3] Interface Control Document (ICD) 0066500000001IC00 - A / 0
[4] Maintenance Technical Manual (Indra PSR) 0066500000031MA01 - C / 0

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
1.8 DEFINITIONS AND ACRONYMS
1.8.1 Definitions
N/A.
1.8.2 Acronyms
µs Microsecond.
AC Alternate Current.
ACP Azimuth Change Pulse.
ADC Analog-to-Digital Converter.
AGSU Active Groups Selector Unit.
AP Anomalous Propagation.
APG Antenna and Pedestal Group.
ARP Azimuth Reference Pulse.
ASTERIX All Purpose Structured Eurocontrol Surveillance Information Exchange.
BIT Built-In Test.
BITE Built-In Test Equipment.
BPSA Bulk Power Supply.
CBU Control & BIT Unit.
CDM Clear Day Map.
CFAR Constant False Alarm Rate.
CH Channel.
CMS Control and Monitoring System.
COHO COHerent Oscillator.
COTS Commercial Off-The-Shelf.
CPC Central Processor Computer.
CPI Coherent Process Interval.

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
CPIP Coherent Process Interval Pair.
dB Decibel.
dBc Decibel (relative to the carrier).
dBm Decibel (relative to one milliwatt).
DC Direct Current.
DDC Digital Down Converter.
DDPG Digital Modulator Demodulator and Processor Group.
DKA Display & Keyboard Assembly.
DP Data Processing.
DRCG Dual Rotary Control Group.
DRP Digital Receiver Processor.
DRU Digital Receiver Unit.
DSP Digital Signal Processor.
DSU Digital Synthesizer Unit.
EPG Exciter and Processor Group.
FGG Frequency Generator Group.
FLU Filter+LNA Unit.
GEPU Gigabit Ethernet PMC Unit.
GFCI Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter.
GHz Gigahertz.
GPB Generic Processor Board.
GRPG Generator, Receiver and Processor Group.
h Hour.
HW Hardware.
Hz Hertz.

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
ICAO International Civil Aviation Organization.
IF Intermediate Frequency.
IFCSU Intermediate Frequency Control and Switch Unit.
kg Kilogram.
km Kilometre.
kW Kilowatt.
LAN Local Area Network.
LNA Low Noise Amplifier.
LO Local Oscillator.
LOSDU Local Oscillators Switching and Distribution Unit.
LRU Line Replaceable Unit.
LVA Large Vertical Aperture.
m Metre.
mA Milliampere.
MHz Megahertz.
mm Millimetre.
MSDS Material safety data sheet.
MSSR Monopulse Secondary Surveillance Radar.
MTAC MultiTime Around Clutter.
MTAT MultiTime Around Target.
MTBCF Mean Time Between Critical Failures.
MTBF Mean Time Between Failures.
MTD Moving Target Detector.
MTI Moving Target Indicator.
MTTR Mean Time To Repair.

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
MVPS Multivoltage Power Supply.
MWCG MicroWave Control Group.
MWCU MicroWave Control Unit.
MWG MicroWave Group.
N/A Not applicable.
NCO Numerically Controlled Oscillator.
NM (nmi) Nautical Mile.
ns Nanosecond.
NTP Network Time Protocol.
NWS National Weather Service.
ºC Degrees Celsius.
PA Power Amplifier.
PACP Power Activation Control Panel.
PC Personal Computer.
ped Pedestal.
PLC Programmable Logic Controller.
PMC PCI Mezzanine Card.
PPI Plan Position Indicators.
PRF Pulse Repetition Frequency.
PRPA Preamplifier.
PRT Pulse Repetition Interval.
psig Pounds per Square Inch Gauge.
PSR Primary Survillance System.
PTCP Pedestal Top Control Panel.
PTIP Pre-Transmit Interpulse Period.

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
RCS Radar Cross Section.
RF Radiofrequency.
RFCSU Control and Switching Unit.
RGCU Receiver Group Control Unit.
RH Relativity Humidity.
RJ Rotary Joint.
rms Root Mean Square.
rpm Revolutions per minute.
RXG Receiver Group.
RXU Receiver Unit.
s Second.
SAC System Area Code.
SCBG Synchronisation Control and Bite Group.
SCP Synthesis and Control Process.
SCR Radar Communication System.
SDCU Signal Distribution Control Unit.
SDG Signal Distribution Group.
SFPU StarFabric PMC Unit.
SIC System Identification Code.
SLG Local Control System.
SP Signal Process.
SRG Remote Control System.
SRS Software Requirements Specification.
SRXU S Band Receiver Unit.
SSA Shelf Switch Assembly.

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
SSR Secondary Surveillance Radar.
STALO STAble Oscillator.
STC Sensitivity Time Control.
STCU Sensitivity Time Control Unit.
SW Software.
SWR Switch Router.
SYNU Synchronisation Unit.
TCP Transmission Control Protocol.
TGT Target Channel.
TISMU Test Injection and Stability Monitoring Unit.
TRIP Transmit-Receive Interpulse Period.
TSU Turning Signal Unit.
TWS Track While Scan.
TXBA Transmiter Blower Assembly.
TXCU Transmission Control Unit.
TXG Transmitter Group.
TXGU Transmission Generation Unit.
UCS Unit Control System.
UDP User Datagram Protocol.
Vac Alternate Current Voltage.
VSWR Video Standing Wave Ratio.
w Watt.
WAN Wide Area Network.
WCD Waveguide Compressor Dehydrator.
WGD Waveguide Duplexer.

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
WGHF Waveguide Harmonic Filter.
WGS Waveguide Switch.
WPD Waveguide Power Load.
WX Weather Channel.

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
2. SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
2.1 INTRODUCTION
Next paragraphs will show the system architecture and information about all main components of this
system.
2.2 SYSTEM ARCHITECTURE
Main components of the system, listed below, are described in the following paragraphs.
 Antenna and Pedestal Group (APG).
 Dual Rotary Control Group (DRCG/PTCP and Junction Box).
 Microwave group (MWG).
 Transmitter group (TXG).
 Generator, Receiver and Processor Group (GRPG).
 LAN Network.
 Control and Monitoring System.
 Radar Communications System.
2.2.1 Antenna and Pedestal Group (APG)
The APG is controlled and monitored by the DRCG/PTCP, and comprises the following elements:
 Antenna.
 Pedestal.
 Rotary Joint.

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
Antenna Support
S-Band Antenna
Pedestal
Rotary Joint
Figure 2.2.1-1. APG Diagram
Figure 2.2.1-2. APG Installation, with a Co-Mounted MSSR Antenna

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
Figure 2.2.1-3. APG Diagram
2.2.1.1 Antenna
The PSR antenna is a COTS element that operates in S-Band (2.7 GHz to 2.9 GHz). It transmits and
receives RF signals generated by the radar and consists of:
 Parabolic reflector.
 Feed horn system.
 Polarizer.
 Two target and two weather channels.
 Mechanical tilt in elevation.
The reflector is parabolic in azimuth (narrow beam pattern) and is set up to obtain a cosecant squared
pattern in the elevation plane.
The feed horn system elements comprise two pyramidal horns to obtain two beams as described in
2.2.1.1.1, but separated by approximately 4.5º in elevation. Only one is used to transmit but both are
used to receive.
Both polarizers (one per beam) provide vertical linear or right-hand circular polarization. Switching
between types of polarization will not affect normal operation of the antenna and can be controlled from
the control and monitoring system.
With regard to the antenna's four ports, the two ports destined for target channels will be waveguide-
made and the two ports destined for weather channels (outputs from the polarizer, orthogonal signal)
will be made of coaxial cables. These four channels are connected directly to the Rotary Joint.

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
Table 2.2.1.1-1. General Specifications of the Antenna
Beams High (RX) and Low (TX / RX)
Type of Reflector Parabolic in azimuth, with reflecting mesh surface in elevation
Illumination System Two pyramidal horns with weather channel
Rotation 10 - 15 rpm
Tilt -3º to +6º
It also has other optional elements:

 A co-mounted LVA antenna.
 Obstruction lights.
 Lightning rod.
Figure 2.2.1.1-1. Diagram of the Antenna Elements

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
2.2.1.1.1 BEAM SPECIFICATIONS AND PATTERNS
The low beam is used for both transmit and receive. The high beam is only used to receive.
Scanning will be carried out with two simultaneously-formed patterns (cosecant squared in elevation
and narrow in azimuth), providing coverage up to 40º in elevation and 360º in azimuth by mechanical
scanning.
Both beams can select either vertical linear or right-hand circular polarization.
The following table summarizes all operating parameters, which will be maintained regardless of
environmental and operating conditions (always within the specified ranges):
Table 2.2.1.1.1-1. Beam Specifications
GENERAL
Operating Frequency 2.7 to 2.9 GHz
Dual Beam (High/Low) For target and weather channels
Polarization Circular (CP) or Vertical Linear (LP), selectable
Illumination System Dual Horns, in vertical array with orthogonal outputs for weather
ICR (Integrated Cancellation Ratio) (Both beams) 20dB min.
Coupling between target/weather in low beam 30dB min.
Coupling between beams for target 25dB min.
LOW BEAM
-3dB Beamwidth of Vertical Pattern Cosecant squared / ≥4.6º
-3dB Beamwidth of Horizontal Pattern 1.45º ± 0.05º
Gain 34 dB minimum
± 10º - ±30º  29dB min. 1

Side lobes in azimuth
± 30º - ±180º  33dB min.
VSWR 1.35:1 maximum
HIGH BEAM
-3dB Beamwidth of Vertical Pattern ≥4.8º, Cosecant squared
-3dB Beamwidth of Horizontal Pattern ≥1.3
Gain 32.5dB minimum
Side lobes in azimuth 22dB minimum
VSWR 1.35:1 maximum
1 With regard to the low beam peak

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
The following figures show the elevation and azimuth radiation patterns:
Figure 2.2.1.1.1-1. Elevation Pattern (Low Beam in Red Colour, Blue Line is Minimum Goal)
Figure 2.2.1.1.1-2. Elevation Pattern Showing Low Beam in Red, High Beam in Deep Blue

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
Figure 2.2.1.1.1-3. Azimuth Pattern
The antenna complies with all these specifications for all frequencies in the interval between 2.7 and 2.9
GHz and for all environmental and operating conditions (within the operating range of the system).
Table 2.2.1.1.1-2. Summary of Mechanical Characteristics
S band antenna: 800 kg

Antenna Support: 430 kg
Weight
Driving Mechanism 1190 kg
Intermediate Element: 354 kg
Dimensions 2.83m x 5 m x 4.3 m
Type of reflector Parabolic in azimuth, with mesh surface in elevation
Rotation speed 10, 12 or 15 rpm (configurable)
Three-phase voltage: 400V (three phases and neutral)

Power requirements
Frequency: 47-63Hz

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
2.2.1.2 Pedestal
The pedestal subsystem is an electromechanical system capable of providing the primary radar antenna
with continuous and constant rotation (including the co-mounted MSSR antenna, if applicable). Speed
rotation is controlled by DRCG (local mode) or by CMS (remote mode).
Figure 2.2.1.2-1. Pedestal Diagram
The pedestal includes the following elements:

 Driving Mechanism.
 Antenna Support.
 Safety devices or interlocks.
2.2.1.2.1 DRIVING MECHANISM
The Driving Mechanism provides rotation to the antenna. The rotation is performed by means of a dual
motor system located in the fixed part, which transmits the movement to the moving part via the main
bearing.
The driving system is composed of an electric motor, a mechanical clutch, a gearbox and an axial
pinion. It also includes a main bearing ring which is the base of the antenna rotation.

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
2.2.1.2.1.1 MOTOR
There are two Motors in the system, for redundancy purposes. Each motor provides a power of 5.5 kW
and is capable of moving the two co-mounted antennas at a pre-determined speed (10, 12 or 15 rpm).
Motors have a thermal probe for temperature protection. A heating element is also included for cold
weather operation. This element is externally controlled (independent from motor power supply) by
means of an external thermostat before starting rotation.
Figure 2.2.1.2.1.1-1. Electric Motor
2.2.1.2.1.2 MECHANICAL CLUTCH
This is the joining element between the motor system and the gearbox. It allows the electrical motor to
be changed without stopping the antenna (maintenance).
Figure 2.2.1.2.1.2-1. Clutch

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
2.2.1.2.1.3 GEARBOX
The gearbox is the element that transforms motor speed into pinion speed. This unit is filled with oil
providing lubrication of the gear wheels and bearings.
Figure 2.2.1.2.1.3-1. Gearbox
2.2.1.2.2 PINION
The axial pin coupling allows assembly deviations in axial alignment and dynamically secures the
pedestal by absorbing the impact during the torque transmission.
This element engages the bearing ring to transmit the necessary movement to the moving part of the
pedestal.
Figure 2.2.1.2.2-1. Axial Pin Coupling

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
2.2.1.2.3 BEARING RING
This element is the base of the antenna rotation.
Figure 2.2.1.2.3-1. Bearing Ring
The main bearing is located in the Driving Mechanism body. The sump must be immersed in oil to keep
the bearing ring-pinion lubricated. This part includes an oil level sensor to indicate low oil level.
2.2.1.2.4 ANTENNA SUPPORT
The antenna support is the mechanical element that connects the Driving Mechanism and the Antenna.
Figure 2.2.1.2.4-1. Antenna Support

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
2.2.1.3 Rotary Joint
The Rotary Joint is part of the PSR tracking subsystem and both RF and electric signals (control, status
and feed) necessary for correct operation of the system pass through this element.
The rotary joint includes the following elements:
 7 RF channels:
 4 PSR channels (2 target, 2 weather).
 3 MSSR channels.
 18 Slip Rings to transfer AC/DC signals between fixed and rotating parts.
 2 encoders.
Table 2.2.1.3-1. Summary of Main Channel Features
CHANNEL TX RX MEANS CONNECTOR FREQUENCY
1- LOW BEAM Yes Yes Waveguide WR284 Aluminium CPR284F [2.7 - 2.9] GHz
2- HIGH BEAM No Yes Waveguide WR284 Aluminium CPR284F [2.7 - 2.9] GHz
3- LOW WEATHER No Yes Coaxial N Type female [2.7 - 2.9] GHz
4- HIGH WEATHER No Yes Coaxial N Type female [2.7 - 2.9] GHz
5- SUM (Σ) Yes Yes Coaxial N Type female [1.0 - 1.1] GHz
6 OMNI (Ω) Yes Yes Coaxial N Type female [1.0 - 1.1] GHz
7- DIFFERENCE (Δ) No Yes Coaxial N Type female [1.0 - 1.1] GHz
Figure 2.2.1.3-1. Rotary Joint Physical Diagram

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
2.2.1.3.1 CHANNEL SPECIFICATIONS
The specifications of each of the Rotary Joint 7 RF channels are given below for 360º rotation.
Table 2.2.1.3.1-1. Detailed Specifications of Rotary Joint Channels
PARAMETER Ch1 Ch2 Ch3 Ch4 Ch5 Ch6 Ch7
1.02 to 1.02 to 1.02 to

Operating frequency (GHz) 2.7 to 2.9 2.7 to 2.9 2.7 to 2.9 2.7 to 2.9
1.10 1.10 1.10
VSWR (MAX) 1.2:1 1.2:1 1.25:1 1.25:1 1.25:1 1.25:1 1.25:1
WOW MAX (change in VSWR with rotation) 0.05 0.05 0.05 0.06 0.06 0.06 0.06
Insertion Loss (dB MAX) 0.15 0.25 0.70 0.65 0.65 0.65 0.65
Phase tracking (MAX) - - - - 1º 1º 1º
Phase tracking with rotation (MAX) - - - - 3º 3º 3º
Peak Power (kW) 200 5 5 5 5 5 5
Mean Power 5kW 75W 75W 75W - - -
Mean Power (Short term) - - - - 3000W 75W 75W
Mean Power (Long term) - - - - 300W 75W 75W
Isolation between channels 60dB minimum
Max. radiation during peak power at 0.2 m 0.1 mW/cm2
Weight < 80 kg
Temperature range (Operational) -40º C to +70º C
Temperature range (Storage) -40º C to +70º C
Pressurization Max. 30 PSI
25cc/min. MAX @ 5 PSI within the operational temperature range @ 10000 feet above
Leakage
sea level
Rotation speed 15 rpm maximum
Torque 15 FT-LBS maximum
No. of slip rings 18
MIN. MTBF 100,000 hours
Colour International Orange FED-STD-595, # 12197 wherever possible to paint

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
2.2.1.3.2 SLIP RING SPECIFICATIONS
Slip Rings are a set of rings designed to transfer the necessary AC/DC signals from the stationary part
to the rotating part (power, status and control). This is possible thanks to some brushes, or equivalent
elements, which move according to rotation of the antenna in contact with the rings.
The signals transferred are as follows:
 Polarizer status signals for both beams.
 Polarizer control signals.
 Obstruction light power signals.
 Polarizer heater power signals.
Table 2.2.1.3.2-1. Slip Rings AC/DC Signals
ROTARY JOINT SLIP RINGS
C1 DC Signals C2 AC Signals
28VDC/0,3A High beam circular status 250VAC/5A Power obstruction light Line
28VDC/0,3A High beam linear status 250VAC/5A Power obstruction light Neutral
28VDC/0,3A Low beam circular status 250VAC/5A Power obstruction light Neutral
28VDC/0,3A Low beam linear status 250VAC/5A Power polarizer heater Line
28VDC/0,3A 28V DC RTN 250VAC/5A Power polarizer heater Neutral
28VDC/0,3A 28V DC polarizer 250VAC/5A Spare Line
28VDC/10A Circular polarizer command 250VAC/5A Spare Neutral
28VDC/10A Linear polarizer command
28VDC/10A 28V polarizer 0Vdc (+28VDC RTN)
28VDC/10A Spare
28VDC/10A Spare
The slip rings are reliable, impermeable and easily accessible for inspection, adjustment or replacement
purposes.

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
2.2.1.3.3 ENCODER SPECIFICATIONS
The Rotary Joint has two redundant angle sensors or encoders. These are electromechanical devices
used to convert the angular position of a target into a digital code.
Figure 2.2.1.3.3-1. Encoder Unit
2.2.1.4 Waveguide Compressor Dehydrator
An Andrew MT050B dehydrator is used. It provides dry air from 2 to 6 PSIG. The waveguide installation
requires a pressure of 1.5 PSIG, therefore an external pressure regulator is used to limit this value,
enough to prevent humidity and degradation on the waveguide.
Figure 2.2.1.4-1. MT050B Dehydrator
The dehydrator includes the following elements:

 An air compressor.
 A membrane dryer.
 Alarms.
 An external pressure regulator.

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
MEMBRANE PRESSURE
REGULATOR
0.1u/1u FILTERS
RESERVOIR TANK
COMPRESSOR
AIR INTAKE FILTER
Figure 2.2.1.4-2. Dehydrator Elements
Figure 2.2.1.4-3. External Regulator
In order to control the correct operation, the pressurizer is designed with the following alarms:
 Power fail: Active when power is removed from the dehydrator.
 High humidity: Enabled when system or dehydrator output humidity rises above 7.5% of relative
humidity. At initial installation, this alarm will be active until the system had been properly purged.
 Excess Run: Factory strapped run time set in accordance with the normal run time for the
dehydrator application.
 Low pressure: If pressure is under 1PSIG.

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
Low Pressure High Humidity
Excess Run Power Fail
Figure 2.2.1.4-4. Alarms Connections
Membrane dehydrators use physical separation by osmosis through a membrane, by which water
molecules are separated from the air. To carry out this procedure, moist air passes through many
capillaries and water is retained inside. This drying method is extremely efficient, has no moving parts
and does not need maintenance.
Table 2.2.1.4-1. Dehydrator Specifications
Pressure at outlet 2 to 6 PSIG (external regulator 0-2 PSIG)
Capacity 7.2 SCFH (204 l/h) or 0.12 SCFM (3.4 l/min)
Dew point -50ºF (-45ºC)
Electrical input 115/230 VAC, 50/60 Hz
Low-pressure alarm <1 PSIG
High-humidity alarm 7.5% RH
Alarm due to excess operating cycle 10 min
Power failure alarm Loss of energy at intake
Net weight 16.1kg
Alarms are monitored by CMS. The hours of compressor operation and the output pressure are
displayed in the front panel.

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
2.2.2 Dual Rotary Control Group (DRCG/PTCP/Junction Box)
Dual Rotary Control Group is responsible for the antenna rotation control. It is composed of three
different elements:
 DRCG, controls the motors’ rotation and monitors the general status of the pedestal.
 PTCP, a control panel located in the motor room where the pedestal is installed.
 Junction Box, an interconnection box installed in the pedestal to facilitate the connectivity and
monitoring of pedestal signals.
The next figure shows the block diagram of the three elements.
Figure 2.2.2-1. Block Diagram DRCG/PTCP/Junction Box

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
2.2.2.1 Dependency Between DRCG and PTCP
The DRCG control and signaling is replicated in the motor room, thanks to the Pedestal Top Control
Panel (PTCP). Therefore DRCG can be operated from the DRCG control panel (LOCAL mode) or from
the PTCP control panel (MAINTENANCE mode). The remote operation is performed through CMS.
The PTCP is a control panel located in the motor room where the pedestal is installed. This room is on a
platform at an elevated height, which depends on installation requirements.
The connection between the PTCP and DRCG is complete. However, simultaneous control via the two
antenna rotation panels is not compatible because of safety reasons.
The PTCP is activated by removing the key from the maintenance position on the DRCG and using it on
the PTCP (master key system).
Figure 2.2.2.1-1. DRCG and PTCP Control
In the same way, a dependence between encoders, obstruction lights and heaters also exists. The logic
of control of those elements is:
 Encoders: The philosophy is a parallel switched logic, meaning the controls in the DRCG and
PTCP change the status of those elements (powered/not powered).
 Obstruction lights: In this case, the philosophy is a parallel logic, meaning the controls in DRCG
and PTCP powers the elements in parallel so if one of the panels is giving power, the other one
cannot disconnect it. In a higher level, the dusk sensor logic is implemented in such a way that if
the sensor is activating the lights, the power cannot be switched off from any panel.
 Heaters: The philosophy is switched logic, meaning the controls in the DRCG and PTCP change
the status of those elements (powered/not powered). Besides, the heaters are controlled by a
thermostat in the Junction Box, and if it is activated, it will have preference over the switches in the
panels.

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
2.2.2.2 Dual Rotary Control Group (DRCG)
The Dual Rotary Control Group (DRCG) controls the motors’ rotation and monitors the general status of
the pedestal. The DRCG is also responsible for managing each safety device designed for its
installation.
The DRCG includes the following elements:
 Control and signaling panel: Allows rotation control, display for controllers’ status, pedestal sensor
status, electric status, etc.
 Two controllers commanded by two possible sources (via terminal or via Modbus/TCP protocol).
 Power supplies.
 A PLC or programmable relay acting as a control element for the different status signals managed
by the panel, with its input and output modules.
 Contactors, in order to disconnect the controllers’ supply in case of an emergency.
 Safety Module, manages the safety loops in the APG.
 A diode board, to prevent unwanted current backflows.
 Electrical protection devices.
 Switches to supply encoders.
 Fans to maintain optimum temperature conditions for correct operation.
 Three-phase filters, one for each drive line, responsible for attenuating unwanted harmonic
frequencies.
 Control and signaling relays.
The Figure 2.2.2.2-1 shows the DRCG components that will be identified in Table 2.2.2.2-1 and the
most important are described in subsequent paragraphs.
The front panel will be described in Figure 2.2.2.2-1.

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
Figure 2.2.2.2-1. DRCG Internal View with Locators

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
Table 2.2.2.2-1. DRCG List of Components
LOCATOR NAME DESCRIPTION
1 CB1 Main breaker
2 RCD1 Differential breaker
3 RV1 Overvoltage protection in main power line
4 CB2 Breaker for motor controller 1
5 CB3 Breaker for motor controller 2
6 CB4 Breaker for motor 1 heater
7 CB5 Breaker for motor 2 heater
8 CB6 Breaker for start-up warning and radiation
9 CB7 Breaker for obstruction lights
10 CB8 Dusk sensor Breaker
11 CB9 Breaker of internal fans
12 CB10 Breaker for PS1, 24 VDC
13 CB11 Breaker for PS2, 24 VDC
14 RV2, RV3 Overvoltage protection for power lines of motors 1 and 2
15 J1 to J9 Connector panel
16 PS1, PS2 24V Power Supplies
17 PS3 Redundancy module for 24V Power Supplies
18 DDC1, DDC2 Polarizer power supplies
19 RDDC Redundancy module for polarizer power supplies
20 LACB Lamp circuit board
21 B1, B2 Fans
22 RV6 to RV8 Data lines Overvoltage protection
23 K13 Oil level for Gearbox 2 activation relay
24 K12 Oil level for Gearbox 1 activation relay

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
Table 2.2.2.2-1. DRCG List of Components
LOCATOR NAME DESCRIPTION
25 K8 Polarization control relay
26 K7 Obstruction lights activation relay
27 K6 Start-Up warning activation relay
28 DRV2 Motor controller 2
29 DRV1 Motor controller 1
30 R1, R2 Air grille
31 FL1, FL2 EMI filters at controller 1 and 2 inputs
32 F1 to F4 Fuse protection for overcurrent in DC lines
33 TB1 Power supply distribution terminals
34 TB3 Modular grounds distributor
35 K1, K2 Contactors for power supply control for motor controllers
36 K9 Safety relay
37 S6 Thermostat for DRCG temperature control
38 COM2 Communication module 2
39 COM1 Communication module 1
40 PLC Programmable Logic Relay
41 K3 Heater activation control relay (motor 1)
42 K4 Heater activation control relay (motor 2)
43 K5 Activation of radiation control relay
44 T1, T2, T3 Current transformers
45 K10 Clutch 1 status relay
46 K11 Clutch 2 status relay Oil level for Gearbox 2 activation relay
47 K14 Relay for motor heaters activation by means of the Junction Box Thermostat
48 TB2 Power supply distribution terminals

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
The DRCG has a mode selector switch that allows the operator to modify the movement of the
equipment (antenna + pedestal + rotary joint) controlling the DRCG according to different modes: local,
maintenance and remote.
Therefore, it can be operated from the DRCG control panel (LOCAL mode), the PTCP control panel
(MAINTENANCE mode) or from control and monitoring system via Ethernet (REMOTE mode). With
regard to these operating modes, it is impossible to enable the PTCP without first removing the key from
the mode selector switch on the main panel.
Power supplies inside the DRCG supply energy to each of the control and signaling elements, and also
provide the required power to the redundant angle information systems (optical encoders). The
encoders collect the RS422 signals used by the radar for correct operation: ACPs and ARPs.
The DRCG protects all lines, for both data and power, established between the radar head equipment
room and Indra equipment installed in the tower (i.e. outdoors: antenna, pedestal, rotary joint and
PTCP) from possible overvoltages caused by lightning.
Apart from monitoring the status of the equipment connected to the DRCG at the front panel, this status
is also reported via LAN to the control and monitoring systems (CMS) responsible for collecting this
information.
2.2.2.3 Connector Panel
All the interfaces of DRCG are located at the top of the cabinet, as shown in the following figure:
Figure 2.2.2.3-1. Connector Panel

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
These interfaces can be divided into three categories:

 Power interfaces
 J1: Main power.
 J2: Power for Motor 1.
 J3: Power for Motor 2.
 J4: Power for heater 1.
 J5: Power for heater 2.
 J6: Power for obstruction lights.
 J7: Power for dusk sensor.
 J8: Power for warnings.
 Control interfaces
 J9: Encoder and polarizer signals.
 J10: Pedestal control signals.
 J11: Control and power signals for wind sensor.
 J12: Encoder 1 signals for GRPG.
 J13: Encoder 2 signals for GRPG.
 J14: Polarizer control signals.
 J15: Interlock signals for radiation and start-up warning.
 Communication interfaces
 J16: LAN control for motor controller 1.
 J17: LAN control for motor controller 2.
 J18: LAN 1 status.
 J19: LAN 2 status.

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
2.2.2.4 Diode Board
In order to prevent unwanted current backflow and simplify the layout of the pilot lamp cables, a diode
board has been included in the design of the DRCG system (see Figure 2.2.2.4-1 and Figure 2.2.2.2-1).
The aim of this diode board is to isolate unwanted emission source signal sensors (lamp test, normally
closed switches…).
Figure 2.2.2.4-1. Diode Board
2.2.2.5 Frequency Converter (Motor Controller)
The frequency converters (see Figure 2.2.2.5-1 and Figure 2.2.2.2-1) are the main elements in the
DRCG because they are in charge of the rotation of pedestal motors, and consequently of the antenna.
The DRCG includes two, one for each motor, each one programmed in such a way that the motor
operation is optimized, and also with communication with the other one to allow a torque equitable
distribution.
The motor controllers are three-phase, 7.5 kW AC frequency converters. Their function is to convert
incoming alternating current into direct current, and later convert it back into alternating current with a
pre-set frequency. This makes possible the modification of the rotation speed of the master motor and
therefore the whole assembly.
The pedestal has two frequency converters, which supply power to both motors. Therefore, the pedestal
can rotate using the motor 1, the motor 2 or usually, using both motors at the same time. Both motors
start according to a predefined acceleration ramp, and after 30 seconds of safety waiting, stop due to
inertia in order not to damage transmission if only one of the motors is stopped.
The control philosophy is Master-Slave. First started motor will be the master and the other motor will be
the slave. The master converter reports its torque to the slave converter via an analogical signal link. This
philosophy intends to share out the wear of the motors and improve the behaviour of the system under
adverse weather conditions. If a motor group fails, the converter which controls it disconnects the drive
train. If the failure affects the master converter, the slave converter becomes master, which means
changing its control mode and is then controlled by setting the speed instead of setting the torque. If a
failure occurs in the slave converter, the master converter continues controlling by speed; the only
difference is that it will not support the entire torque of the assembly. If failure occurs in any converter
instead of in the motor, the switching process will be the same.

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
Figure 2.2.2.5-1. Frequency Converter
The converters are designed with a series of peripherals for easier access:
 Panel kit mounted at the control panel front.
 Ethernet communication expansion card, used to control remotely the converters via LAN (CMS).
 Input/output expansion card, allowing to install more cards if required.
 Fiber-optic communication expansion card, used for maintenance tasks.
2.2.2.5.1 INPUTS/OUTPUTS
The frequency converters include some inputs and outputs for control, digital and analog, to manage
some system capabilities.
 Inputs:
 Start-Up blocking: It is a safety signal to avoid an untimely motor start-up; controlled by the
PLC.
 On/Off control input: Reception by the converters will depend on the control mode currently set
on the DRCG.
 LOCAL control mode: The OFF/ON signal is sent by the pushbuttons located at the
DRCG front panel for each motor. These signals are first processed by the
Programmable Relay to be converted from two pulse signals to one single level signal.
 REMOTE control mode: The OFF/ON signal is sent through Fieldbus, using Modbus
TCP/IP protocol, from CMS.
 MAINTENANCE control mode: The OFF/ON signal is sent by the pushbuttons located at
the PTCP front panel for each motor. These signals are first processed by the
Programmable Relay to be converted from two pulse signals to one single level signal.

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
 Control Mode indicating input (LOCAL/MAINTENANCE or REMOTE): This signal helps the
converters to recognize the Control Mode that the DRCG is operating under and, based on
this, to distinguish between the source of commands to configure the digital inputs or Fieldbus.
Thanks to this and other Hardware measures, it is possible to ensure independence between
the operating modes and prevent having conflicts due to contradictory commands.
 Speed Reference Input: The speed signal is sent via two digital signals from the speed
selector control located on the front of the DRCG (see Figure 2.2.2.2-1). These are processed
by the Programmable Relay before entering the converters. The three possible antenna
speeds are encoded via these two digital inputs.
 Status from the other frequency converter: This input manages the operation philosophy for
Master/Slave, due to the necessity for each converter to know the status of the other one. This
way, when a converter receives the start-up command, it will be master or slave depending on
the information received from this input about the other converter.
 PTC: This input allows the control management of the temperature sensor for the motor, PTC.
 Torque input: This input provides the reference value of the torque from the other converter.
The slave converter will use this reference to adjust the speed of the motor.
 Outputs:
 Motor "ON": This output shows the turning status of the motor.
 Start-up warning: For "REMOTE" control mode, there is an activation of 30 seconds of this
signal, to warn of imminent rotation of the antenna.
 Motor Overcurrent: The converter activates this signal via firmware, if the maximum stipulated
current is exceeded. This causes an alarm in the converter.
 Warning for transmission failure: The converter activates this signal via firmware when the
torque produced is below a stipulated lower limit. Its activation indicates a bad operation of the
transmission of power between the motor axis and the pinion.
 Motor overtemperature: The converter activates this signal when an anomalous value in the
thermistor of the motor, PTC, is detected showing an overtemperature status in the associated
motor and a failure in the converter.
 PTC: Combined with the PTC input, allows the management of the temperature sensor.
 Torque output: Provides the torque reference to the other converter to establish the speed of
its associated motor in case of being the slave.

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
2.2.2.5.2 FREQUENCY CONVERTERS CONFIGURATION FOR INSTALLATION IN IT NETWORKS
When the DRCG is installed in network with an isolated neutral (IT), it will be necessary to disconnect
the capacitors of the EMC filter of each converter because the equipment can be damaged if they are
connected. To disconnect, it is enough taking out the screws shown in the Figure 2.2.2.5.2-1.
Figure 2.2.2.5.2-1. Screws Location
2.2.2.6 Safety Devices or Interlocks
For safety purposes, the pedestal includes some interlocks. They are connected in series so, when one
of them is opened, the pedestal is not allowed to start operation (see Figure 2.2.2.6-2).
 Emergency button: There is one emergency button in the DRCG and another in the PTCP to allow
the operator to stop the antenna immediately.
 Safety Switch: Switch located in the motor room that disables the antenna movement while it is
activated.
 Antenna Locking: After stopping the antenna, it is possible to lock the antenna at any angle. Once
locked, the system is not allowed to start operation (see Figure 2.2.2.6-1).
All of these devices stop power to the motors, and the system indicates which device(s) have been
activated.
Figure 2.2.2.6-1. Locking Mechanism

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
Figure 2.2.2.6-2. Pedestal Interlock Chain Elements
In order to guarantee safe operation, a double-loop safety relay is used. This device is installed before
the cut-off signal to the contactor coil to guarantee safe operation of the system via two safety loops:
 The first loop maintains all system interlocks in series. It opens if any of the interlocks is active.
 The second loop immediately opens when the first loop has been opened so it must be reset. The
status of this second loop is displayed on the DRCG front panel (RESTARTED SYSTEM) and is
reset by passing to 0 (OFF) in the system.

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
Figure 2.2.2.6-3. Safety Module
Opening the contacts of the safety module (Figure 2.2.2.6-3) ensures that no energy reaches the
contactors (Figure 2.2.2.6-4) responsible for commanding energy supply to the converters.
Figure 2.2.2.6-4. Contactor

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
2.2.2.7 Pedestal Top Control Panel (PTCP)
The PTCP works as an interconnection between DRCG and the distribution of the status and control
signals of the pedestal. Internally, it is composed of interconnection terminals that can be used to check
the pedestal signals (see Figure 2.2.2.7-1) and a diode board similar to the one installed in the DRCG
(see 2.2.2.4).
Figure 2.2.2.7-1. Internal View of PTCP
2.2.2.7.1 BOTTOM CONNECTOR PANEL
Connects the pedestal signals with the PTCP.
Figure 2.2.2.7.1-1. Bottom Connector Panel of PTCP
 J3: Wind sensor.

 J4: Power for obstruction lights.
 J5: Power for start-up warning and radiation warning.
 J13: Encoders and polarization signals.
 J14: Pedestal status and control signals.

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
2.2.2.7.2 TOP CONNECTOR PANEL
Connects the PTCP with the DRCG.
Figure 2.2.2.7.2-1. Top Connector Panel for PTCP
 J1: Power for obstruction lights.

 J2: Connector for activation of a thermostat.
 J8: Encoder 1 signals.
 J9: Encoder 2 signals.
 J10: Polarizer signals.
 J11: Status and control signals of pedestal.
 J12: Safety switch connection to the pedestal.
 J15: Wind sensor signals.

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
2.2.2.8 Junction Box
Internally (see Figure 2.2.2.8-1) is composed of interconnection terminals and a thermostat with a
temperature probe that allows the activation of the heaters when outside temperature is below 10ºC.
Figure 2.2.2.8-1. Internal View of Junction Box
2.2.2.8.1 CONNECTOR PANEL
At the bottom of the Junction Box, some connectors allow its connection with the PTCP and the different
elements in the pedestal.
Figure 2.2.2.8.1-1. Connector Panel of Junction Box

 J1: Pedestal status signals to PTCP.
 J2: Thermostat signals to PTCP.
 Cable glands (P3 to P10): Allow connection of the different components of the pedestal.

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
2.2.3 Microwave Group (MWG)
The Microwave Group is responsible for guiding the signal generated by the EPG and amplified by the
Transmitter to the Antenna Group (signal transmission channel), and in the other way, from the antenna
to each of the two redundant receiver channels (target reception channel - TGT - and weather channel -
WX). Physically, it is located on top of the TXG and GRPG racks.
The antenna associated with the PSR has four signal channels corresponding to the combinations of
the two antenna beams (high beam - HI, and low beam - LOW) with the two processing channels (target
- TGT, and weather - WX), resulting in:
 HI-TGT: high beam of the antenna associated with the target processing channel.
 LOW-TGT: low beam of the antenna associated with the target processing channel.
 HI-WX: high beam of the antenna associated with the weather information processing channel.
 LOW-WX: low beam of the antenna associated with the weather information processing channel.
It is also possible to receive signals with circular polarization to improve the system performance when
the level of weather is high.
The four signals are located in the operating band of the radar (2.7 – 2.9 GHz) and all of them are
reception channels, with the LOW-TGT channel also being used for power signal transmission. These
four channels work in parallel without any kind of temporary switching that could produce blind rings of
coverage in the range system.
The reception channels are duplicated (redundancy) and the signal received can be guided along any of
the two paths. The control system is responsible for determining the path of the different signals through
the redundant elements, either as the result of an automatic decision or the choice made by the
operator using the management system.
The standby channel does not receive signals, but test signals are injected to check that the units are
operating correctly. Test signals are received from each frequency generator (TXGU in the EPG). The
active FGG may inject signals into the active channel. The FGG on standby will insert test targets into
the channel on standby.
The MWG also has internal redundant power supplies to feed elements of the group that need voltage
supply, such as switches, control and BITE boards, LNAs and programmable attenuators.
The control and BITE board is redundant and is responsible for sending different commands to the
different switches and collecting the status of these switches and power supplies. Information on STC
attenuation curves that must be loaded into the programmable attenuators will also be contained in
these control boards.
In order to prevent losses due to cabling between the different elements, they are connected in cascade
whenever possible.

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
Figure 2.2.3-1. MWG Physical Configuration
Figure 2.2.3-2. MWG Physical Diagram

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
2.2.3.1 Functional Description
The general operation concept of the MWG, described as a sequence of operating steps, is as follows:
 The signal generated by the EPG and amplified by the power stages of the transmitter is the input
of the MWG, which is responsible for guiding it directly to the Antenna (APG) to be radiated. This
signal travels through a harmonic filter to prevent harmonic radiation to the maximum extent
possible. Samples are taken along this channel from both the transmitted and the reflected signal
towards the transmitter using a bi-directional coupler for monitoring purposes.
 The PSR receives information from the antenna via four different channels: LOW – TGT, HI – TGT,
LOW – WX, and HI – WX, based on the antenna beam used for receiving and subsequent data
processing (either to obtain targets or to obtain weather information). For the LOW-TGT channel,
the first one is partially the same as the transmission channel, and in order to prevent the
transmitted signal from accessing the reception channel and to prevent the received signal from
reaching the transmitter, a duplexer is used. It is along this channel that another signal sample is
taken, also using a directional coupler, to monitor the power reflected from the APG.
 Along the signal reception path, the signal passes, in all four cases, through a switch that guides
the signal towards one of the redundant channels of the Microwave Group. After this switch there is
a Receiver Protector (RP) and a programmable attenuator (STC) to protect the input processing
chain from extremely high power that could damage it. The signal is then passed through a band-
pass filter to remove noise and out-of-band interfering signals, and it then finally passes through an
LNA with a very low noise figure so that it affects the total noise figure of the system as little as
possible. All units after the switch are redundant for the two possible paths.
 The output of the LNA is guided towards the processing chain, channel 1 or channel 2, depending
on which is selected on the switch. It is done via the RFCSU, which is responsible for guiding the
signal depending on the selected polarization and sending it towards the corresponding RXG. It is
possible for the channel that is not selected (i.e. the channel on standby) to pass through
calibration loops.
Figure 2.2.3.1-1. Functional Diagram of the MWG

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
2.2.3.1.1 LOW-TGT CHANNEL
This channel is used for both, to receive the low beam signal associated with the target processing
channel, taking samples of the signal reflected from the antenna, and to guide the transmitter output
signal to the antenna to be radiated, taking samples of the signal transmitted and the signal reflected to
the transmitter. Monitoring samples are taken using directional couplers.
Figure 2.2.3.1.1-1. Conceptual Model of the LOW-TGT Channel
Figure 2.2.3.1.1-2. LOW-TGT to Transmit and Receive

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
Along the transmission path, the RF input signal is received from the Transmitter through a stripline-
waveguide transition connecting the output of the Splitter/Combiner Assembly to the MWG.
 Harmonic filter: This is the first element to be found. Its function is to filter signal harmonics to
comply with applicable standards regarding harmonic radiation.
 Directional coupler: This takes samples of the signal transmitted and the power reflected towards
the transmitter.
 Duplexer: This is the element that makes possible the use of this channel in both directions. It
guides, in this case, the signal towards the antenna.
 Directional coupler: It takes samples of the signal reflected from the antenna.
The output to the antenna uses waveguide due to the high peak power it must withstand.
The reception path starts with the signal coming from the APG:
 Directional coupler: This is the same coupler found at the end of the transmission channel where
test targets can be injected through to check and calibrate this reception path and, as already
mentioned, through which a sample can be obtained of the signal reflected from the antenna to the
receivers.
 Duplexer: In this case, it guides the signal to the receivers.
 Waveguide switch: Either of the receivers will be selected according to its position. The channel
that is on standby is connected, via this switch, to the test signal injection block to check for correct
operation. The level of this test signal may become adjustable by inserting an attenuator between
the switch and the test signal injection block.
 Receiver protector: The first redundant element of the reception chain. It includes programmable
attenuator features and its function is to protect the receiver (electronics) from possible signal
peaks, adjust the programmable attenuator to maximum during transmission and generate an STC
curve for the first mile of reception.
 Band-pass filter: To reduce to the maximum extent possible the effect of out-of-band emissions that
could saturate the different elements of the reception chain. This element is also redundant.
 LNA: Has a very low noise figure in order to affect the total noise figure of the receiver as little as
possible. This element is also redundant.
This reception channel uses waveguide up to the Receiver Protector in order to be able to withstand the
power that could reach this channel, and to have as little insertion loss as possible.
Figure 2.2.3.1.1-3. Elements of the LOW-TGT Channel

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
The following paragraphs describe the monitoring signals taken in this group and sent to the TXG.
 Monitoring Transmitted Signal: This sample is taken using the Directional Coupler located after the
Harmonic Filter along the transmission path. This coupler is bi-directional as it is the same one that
allows a sample to be taken of the signal reflected to the transmitter. It is important that the sample
taken by this coupler is low enough to not excessively reduce the transmitted power (coupling
value ≈ 40dB). The signal obtained is attenuated along the path to the transmitter (fixed
attenuators, cabling and splitter) where it passes through some crystal detectors that obtains the
value of the transmitted power envelope and sends information to the transmitter control cards.
 Monitoring Reflected Signal to the Transmitter: The same coupler mentioned in the above section
is used to take this sample (Bi-directional coupler). The path that this sample takes to the control
cards is the same as above (loss due to fixed attenuators, cabling and splitter). If the reflected
power exceeds the limit of 63dBm (2kW), transmission is inhibited to prevent possible damage to
the equipment.
 Monitoring the Reflected Signal at the Antenna: This sample is taken using the Directional Coupler
corresponding to the first element of the reception path. This is the same coupler used to inject test
signals to check and verify correct operation of the active reception channel, and therefore this
coupler should be bi-directional, as in the case of the previous samples. With regard to loss and
power of the signal received by the glass detector, this case is the same as the previous cases.
The only difference is that now, the reflected power at the antenna is being measured and if it is too
high, it could damage the receivers. If the reflected power exceeds the limit of 63dBm (2kW),
transmission is inhibited to prevent possible damage to the equipment.
Figure 2.2.3.1.1-4. Signals Monitored in MWG
2.2.3.1.2 HI-TGT, HI-WX AND LOW-WX CHANNELS
These three channels are only for signal reception. They are exactly the same and are received via
coaxial from the antenna. All of their elements are coaxial since the power they have to withstand is
much lower than in the case of the LOW-TGT channel. Each of these channels includes a lightning
protector.
The reception path starts with the signal coming from the APG:
 Lightning protector: Lightning protection element that prevents the high power introduced by this
type of discharge from reaching the processing channels and maybe destroying the electronics.
 Directional coupler: This allows test targets to be injected to verify and calibrate this reception path.

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
 Coaxial switch: Either of the receivers is selected according to its position. The standby channel is
connected, via this switch, to the test signal injection block to check for correct operation. The level
of this test signal may become adjustable by inserting an attenuator between the switch and the
test signal injection block.
 Coaxial Receiver Channel: Performs the following functionalities in only one unit. This element is
redundant for all three channels.
 Receiver protector: Its function is to protect the receiver (electronics) from possible signal
peaks.
 Programmable attenuator: Mutter function, i.e. it is set to maximum during transmission. It also
generates an STC curve for the first mile of reception.
 Band-pass filter: To reduce to the maximum extent possible the effect of out-of-band
emissions that could saturate the different elements of the reception chain.
 LNA: Has a very low noise figure in order to affect the total noise figure of the receiver as little
as possible.
The following figure shows the conceptual model of the channels described:
Figure 2.2.3.1.2-1. Conceptual Model of the HI-TGT, HI-WX and LOW-WX Channel
Figure 2.2.3.1.2-2. Elements of the HI-TGT Channel, and WX Channels

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
2.2.3.2 Lightning Protector
These are elements added to the system to protect it against possible lightning strikes and prevent the
high power introduced by this type of discharge from reaching the processing channels and maybe
destroying the electronics.
There are three of these elements in the system located at the inputs of the HI-TGT, LOW-WX and HI-
WX channels (just before the Directional Couplers). Such protection is not necessary for the LOW-TGT
channel as this is a waveguide channel that is grounded for protection.
Two types of lightning protector are available on the market: gas tube protectors and quarter-wave stub
protectors. The first type reacts to the power received, ionizing the gas and redirecting this high level of
power to ground. However, it has a much slower response than the second type, which has an
immediate response and therefore the residual power reaching the equipment would be much lower.
This latter type is designed with a quarter-wave stub that prevents the interfering signal from passing,
also redirecting it to ground.
In our case, the default configuration includes quarter-wave stub lightning protectors. This element is
grounded via a conductor that is connected to the lightning protector using a screw at the base.
Figure 2.2.3.2-1. Lightning Protectors in the MWG
2.2.3.3 Harmonic Filter
The harmonic filter is the first element that the signal finds along the transmission channel (from the
transmitter to the antenna). This element is included to limit harmonic radiation in order to comply with
applicable standards.
It is a waveguide element since it must be capable of withstanding the system's high level of
transmission power across the entire operating band (peak of approximately 25 kW across the
operating band (2.7 - 2.9 GHz) for a maximum operating cycle of 11%, with maximum pulse duration of
100µs).
Figure 2.2.3.3-1. Harmonic Filter of the MWG

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
2.2.3.4 Directional Couplers
Five directional couplers are found in the MWG, with two of these in the LOW-TGT channel. These are
identical waveguide bi-directional couplers because this channel (LOW-TGT) needs incident and
reflected wave information and must enable test signal injection. The other three coaxial directional
couplers are located in each of the other three channels and are identical.
2.2.3.4.1 WAVEGUIDE BI-DIRECTIONAL COUPLER
There are two of these couplers in the MWG, both in the LOW-TGT channel. They use waveguides due
to the high levels of power that they must be able to withstand (peak of approximately 25 kW in the 2.7 -
2.9 GHz frequency band with a maximum operating cycle of 11%). However, the coupled outputs are
Type N coaxial connectors since the power along this path is much lower than the power that the main
waveguide path must support due to the high coupling value.
One of the couplers is located just after the harmonic filter and is only used by the transmission channel,
where the signal passes from the harmonic filter through the coupler towards the duplexer, which guides
the signal towards the APG. The Type N connectors on either side are used for taking samples of the
transmitted signal and the signal reflected to the transmitter.
The other coupler is located after the duplexer and is used in both the transmission path and the
reception path. In this case, only a sample of the signal reflected from the APG will be taken and the
other Type N port will be used to inject test signals into the operative channel.
Figure 2.2.3.4.1-1. Bi-directional Couplers of the MWG
2.2.3.4.2 COAXIAL DIRECTIONAL COUPLER
This coupler receives the RF input signal from the APG (via the lightning protector) when it is sent to the
switch, which selects the currently active channel. Its main function is to allow test signals to be injected
into the active channel. There are three Coaxial Directional Couplers in the MWG: one at the input of
the HI–TGT channel, one at the input of the HI–WX channel, and one at the input of the LOW–WX
channel.
Figure 2.2.3.4.2-1. Coaxial Directional Couplers in the MWG

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
2.2.3.5 Duplexer
The duplexer is one of the most important elements of the MWG as it allows the LOW–TGT channel to
be used for both transmitting the high-power RF signal to the APG (to the low beam horn) and receiving
the low beam signal and guiding it towards the operative reception channel.
It is a WR284 waveguide element as it must be capable of supporting the system's transmission powers
(peak powers of 25kW with a maximum operating cycle of 11% and a maximum pulse width of 100
microseconds, in the 2.7 - 2.9 GHz frequency band). A functional diagram of this element is shown
below:
Transmitter Port 1 Port 2

Antenna
Port 4
Power Load Port 3
Receiver
Figure 2.2.3.5-1. Functional Diagram of the Duplexer
As can be seen on the diagram above, the duplexer has four ports following the path of the arrow. The
first port is used as an input for the high-power signal from the transmitter, and the second is the output
of this signal to the APG and the input of the signal received for the LOW-TGT channel. This signal will
then be guided to port three en route to the active receiver (passing through the corresponding
elements). Finally, port four will be terminated with an adapted load that is capable of supporting high
power, as described in the following section.
Figure 2.2.3.5-2. Duplexer in the MWG

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
2.2.3.6 Power Load
This is a passive element included in the design to prevent power reflected from the APG (in the worst
case, peak power of 25kW if total reflection occurs at the antenna, with a maximum operating cycle of
11% and a pulse duration of up to 100 microseconds) from reaching the transmitter, whenever possible.
Therefore, it is a WR284 waveguide element. The power load is allocated so that the signal that could
damage the transmitter is absorbed by it.
Figure 2.2.3.6-1. Power Load in the MWG
2.2.3.7 Switches
As with the couplers, there are two types of switches in the MWG: one waveguide switch for the LOW-
TGT channel, and a further three coaxial switches for the other channels. In total there are four switches
that are used to select which of the redundant channels is operative and which remains on standby.
2.2.3.7.1 WAVEGUIDE SWITCH
This is the switch that guides the signal to the active channel while receiving the signal via the LOW-
TGT channel. It is also used to inject the test signal into the channel that is on standby. It can be
operated by hand if the electromechanical control fails.
It is a waveguide (type WR284) element as it must be capable of supporting the maximum transmission
peak power, if total signal reflection occurs at the antenna (a peak of up to 25kW with a maximum
operating cycle of 11% and a pulse duration of up to 100 microseconds). .
Figure 2.2.3.7.1-1. Waveguide Switch in the MWG

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
2.2.3.7.2 COAXIAL SWITCH
The functions of this element are the same as for the waveguide switch, i.e. to guide the signal to the
operative channel and act as an element to inject test signals into the standby channel. The only
difference is that in this case, it is a coaxial element as it does not have to withstand the same power as
the waveguide switch. The switch can be operated by hand if the electromechanical control fails.
Figure 2.2.3.7.2-1. Coaxial Switches in the MWG
2.2.3.8 Receiver Protector with Programmable Attenuator Function
This is the first element of the redundant part of the LOW-TGT channel, and there are two of these
elements in the MWG. It must be capable of supporting a maximum peak power of 25kW with a
maximum operating cycle of 11% and a maximum pulse duration of 100 microseconds, so therefore it
uses WR284 type waveguide. In this case, it also includes the programmable attenuator function (STC).
One channel or the other is selected using the waveguide switch.
The recovery time of the RP should be a low value so that the minimum coverage range is as little as
possible. More specifically, a maximum value of 3µs should be met for the short pulse of the system,
which is responsible for detecting targets at short ranges.
WARNING
Radiation hazard. Do not open the device.

This unit contains a radioactive isotope (Tritium, H3 or T) in
less than 1%. See 4.3.1 for safety indications.
Figure 2.2.3.8-1. Receiver Protector with Programmable Attenuator Function in the MWG

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
2.2.3.9 Filter + LNA Unit (FLU)
This is an LRU connected immediately after the Receiver Protector described in the previous point (in
cascade) without using cables, thereby avoiding any additional loss. It belongs to the redundant section
of the LOW-TGT reception channel, just like the previous element, and therefore there are two of these
units in the system.
In this case, the maximum power that the elements forming this unit should support, is the maximum
output permitted by the Receiver Protector.
The unit is composed of two elements: a Band-Pass Filter and a Low Noise Amplifier.
 Band-Pass Filter: This removes signals that are outside the band of interest of the system, to the
maximum extent possible
 Low Noise Amplifier (LNA): This is the last element of the MWG. From here, the signal is sent to
the first switching unit, which allows selection of the receiver (RXG) to which the signal is going to
be sent.
Figure 2.2.3.9-1. FLUs in the MWG

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
2.2.3.10 Coaxial Receiver Channel (CRCH)
This is an LRU corresponding to the reception channel for HI-TGT channel and weather channels. All of
its elements are connected in cascade, without using cables, thereby avoiding any additional loss.
There are six of these units in the system to include the redundant HI-TGT channel (1 and 2) and both
redundant weather channels (LOW-WX 1 and 2, and HI-WX 1 and 2). The different redundant channels
are selected via three coaxial switches.
In this case, the maximum power that this unit should support is much lower than for the LOW-TGT
channel. They are capable of supporting a maximum peak power of 1kW with a maximum operating
cycle of 11% and a maximum pulse duration of 100µs.
The Coaxial Receiver Channels treat the received signal in the same way as the LOW-TGT channels
do, with the only difference being that in this case, all elements are a single LRU.
Figure 2.2.3.10-1. Coaxial Receiver Channel in the MWG

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
2.2.3.11 Shelf Switch Assembly (SSA)
This is responsible for guiding the different test signals from each of the two test signal generation
groups (EPG 1 or EPG 2) to each of the four reception channels, whether active or on standby. These
tests aim to check for correct operation of each of the elements of the microwave group.
Figure 2.2.3.11-1. Conceptual Model of the Test Signal Injection Assembly
Figure 2.2.3.11-2. Test Shelf Switch Assembly in the MWG
The figure above shows the two parts of the unit that allows injection in both the operative and standby
channels.

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
2.2.4 Transmitter Group (TXG)
The Transmitter Group of the PSR system is responsible for amplifying the RF signal to be transmitted.
The TXG is composed of ten solid state amplifiers in a redundancy of "8+2" so that a failure of any
element does not affect the system’s normal operation. The transmitter also has "hot-repair elements"
allowing the damaged element to be replaced without having to shut down the system.
Another important characteristic is the progressive degradation of operational requirements or "graceful
degradation". This means that if any of the amplifying modules fails, the total power of the system will
decrease depending on the number of failed transistors but the coverage still complies with minimum
operational requirements.
The input signal (the RF signal to be amplified) will be selectable as the signal generator is redundant
(EPG 1 or EPG 2).
The TXG is made up of the following elements:
 Solid-state amplifiers (10 units or 12 as an optional configuration).
 Solid-state preamplifiers (2 units).
 Low-loss combiners and splitters.
 Air-cooling system with 2+1 redundancy.
 Transmitted signal test port.
 Redundant Control and Monitoring Board.
 Redundant Multivoltage Power Supplies with 1+1 redundancy.
 Redundant Bulk Power supplies with 3+1 redundancy.
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
CONTROL & MONITOR

BOARDS
10 RF AMPLIFIER
PANELS
(FAIL-SOFT)
REDUNDANT
TX SIGNAL BLOWERS
REDUNDANT PRE- SAMPLE
AMPLIFIERS CONNECTOR
REDUNDANT BULK
REDUNDANT MULTI VOLTAGE POWER SUPPLIES
POWER SUPPLIES
Figure 2.2.4-1. TXG Physical Internal Diagram: Front (10 PA configuration)

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
Figure 2.2.4-2. Physical Diagram: Back (10 PA configuration)

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
The main function of the TXG is to amplify the RF signal for transmission. In addition, it provides signal
samples to measure the stability of the system at different points.
The amplification chain consists of a first stage comprising a pre-amplifier and a final stage comprising
10 or 12 power amplifiers.
Figure 2.2.4.1-1. Amplification Chain (10 PA configuration)
The following figure shows the blocks that make up the TXG. The Harmonic Filter and Coupler
elements, connected after the cabin output, are explained in the Microwave Group for convenience. In
addition, the duplexer mentioned that allows signals to be transmitted and received via the same path
also belongs to the Microwave Group.
Figure 2.2.4.1-2. TXG Block Diagram
The following sections describe all the elements of these subsystems in detail.

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
2.2.4.2 Transmitter Control Unit (TXCU)
This is a redundant element that makes up the Transmitter Control Circuit. In the event of a fault,
automatic switching will occur, although manual switching is also permitted.
It monitors and controls operation of the Transmitter Group, and its functions are as follows:
 To act as an interface between the SCP (in SCBG group) and Transmitter, and between the
CMS/CPC and Transmitter.
 To carry out commands received from the CMS/CPC or SCP.
 To collect BITE signals for reporting purposes:

 PAs and PRPAs.
 Power supplies and blowers.
 Self-test.
 Temperature, pulse width, VSWR.
 To control synchronisms (short pulse, long pulse, blanking) and transmission times.
 In the event of a critical failure, to detect and report the failure and activate an interlock to inhibit
transmission.
 Antenna Safety Switch.
 Radiation inhibit from the front panel of the TXG.
 Fault in 2 out of 3 blowers.
 Overvoltage in 40V power supplies, or failure of one out of four power supplies.
 Less than 8 PAs /10 PAs operating correctly or 11kW / 15 kW of output power.
 Ethernet communication failure with SCP.
 Active pre-amplifier and position of transfer switch do not match.
 System clocks failure.
 Transistor polarization voltage failure.
 To select RF signal at input (EPG 1 or EPG 2).
 To select the active Pre-amplifier.

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
Figure 2.2.4.2-1. TXG Control Board

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
2.2.4.3 Pre-amplifier Panels (PRPA)
The Pre-amplifier panel is a redundant element belonging to the RF Amplification Chain subsystem that
will switch automatically to the standby unit in case of a critical failure in the operative unit. In addition,
both panels receive the RF signal and operate continuously so that when switching to the standby pre-
amplifier, it is already "hot" and ready to operate ("hot swap").
The PRPA is the first stage in the transmitter RF Amplification Chain and its main functions are:
 To amplify the signal coming from the TXGU (RF signal generator, in the EPG) to the right level in
order to excite the next amplification stage (the 10 PAs or 12 as an optional configuration).
 To ensure that the amplified signal does not exceed pulse width and operating cycle restrictions.
 To prevent such failures spreading and damaging subsequent devices.
Figure 2.2.4.3-1. TXG Pre-Amplifier Panels

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
2.2.4.4 Power Amplifier Panels (PA)
The Amplifier Panel is a redundant element (N+2 redundancy) belonging to the RF Amplification Chain
subsystem. N+2 redundancy prevents failure in any of the 10 PAs (or 12 as an optional configuration),
affecting the operational system requirements, thereby achieving progressive degradation ("graceful
degradation").
The set of 10 PAs represents the second and final stage of the transmitter RF Amplification Chain.
Figure 2.2.4.4-1. TXG Amplifier Panels

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
2.2.4.5 Splitter/Combiner Assembly (SCA)
This element is located at the back of the transmitter cabinet. Its main features are:
 Amplitude balance.
 Phase balance.
 Low loss (stripline technology).
Both the Pre-amplifier Panels and the Amplifier Panels are directly connected to this element, avoiding
additional connectors and cabling (avoiding additional losses).
The different parts of the assembly are:
 1:2 splitter: Splits the signal from the generator into two paths for both PRPAs.
 1:10 splitter: Splits the signal from the operative PRPA into 10 equal signals for the PAs. For the
configuration with 12 PA the splitter will be 1:12.
 10:1 combiner: Combines the outputs from the 10 PAs before passing to the next group MWG. For
the configuration with 12 PA the combiner will be 12:1.
There is a stripline to waveguide transition at the output of the combiner to connect the amplified signal
to the MWG.
Figure 2.2.4.5-1. TXG Splitter/Combiner Assembly (10 PA configuration)

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
2.2.4.6 Blowers
The TXG is cooled by forced air by means of blowers that represent the Transmitter Cooling System
subsystem.
This is an N+1 redundancy element, i.e. the system can operate without being interrupted, compliance
with its operational requirements with 2 out of 3 blowers working. This fact will report an alarm but not
produce a system shutdown. If a fault was detected in 2 of the 3 blowers, an interlock would be
activated to inhibit transmission, thereby protecting the system from possible overheating due to a lack
of ventilation.
Forced air is distributed from the lower part of the PRPAs and PAs and through the four air channels in
each of them, cooling the heat sinks of the RF amplifier modules. Air enters and exits through EMI and
dust filters.
Figure 2.2.4.6-1. TXG Blowers
2.2.4.7 Power Supplies
These make up the Power Supply Assembly subsystem, which is composed of two groups: MVPS and
BPS.
Figure 2.2.4.7-1. TXG Power Supplies

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
2.2.4.7.1 MULTIVOLTAGE POWER SUPPLIES (MVPS)
Following the same configuration as Blowers, this is a group of two power supplies with 1+1
redundancy, i.e. the two supplies operate simultaneously and, in the event of a failure, a single supply
would be capable of providing the necessary voltages for correct system operation.
 They provide power at +5V, +15V, -15V and -50V to PRPAs and PAs.
 They have On-Line repair capability.
2.2.4.7.2 BULK POWER SUPPLIES (BPS)
This is a group of four power supplies with 3+1 redundancy, i.e. the four supplies operate
simultaneously and, in the event of a failure, three supplies would be capable of providing the necessary
voltage for correct operation of the system, like Blowers and MVPS.
 Provide power at +40V to PRPAs and PAs.
 On-Line repair capacity.
 Overtemperature, overcurrent and overvoltage protection.
2.2.4.8 Auxiliary Elements
 Harmonic Filter: To attenuate the level of harmonics.

 Output directional coupler: To provide forward and reverse transmitted power and antenna reverse
power signal samples to the video detectors.
 Pulse width measurement.
 Peak power monitoring.
 VSWR monitoring.
 Transfer Switch and Manual Attenuator: To select the operative pre-amplifier and adjust the
excitation power to the PAs.
 Signal generator selector switch: To select the TXGU that will provide the RF signal.
 Sampling for System Stability Monitor: Samples are taken from 3 points using directional couplers
that are connected to a 3PST switch, controlled by the TXCU, which will select one of the three
signals to be sent to the System Stability Monitor.
 Sample from the Transmitter input.
 Sample from the Power Amplifiers input.
 Sample from the Transmitter output.

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
Figure 2.2.4.8-1. MWG Auxiliary Elements

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
2.2.5 Generator Receiver and Processor Group (GRPG)
The Exciter/Receiver/Processor Group of the PSR (hereinafter GRPG) has three main functions:
 To generate the RF signal (two frequencies) to be sent to the transmitter for amplification and
transmission.
 To receive the signal from the four channels (RF signal, two frequencies) that come from the APG
and passes through the MWG where it is down converted to Intermediate Frequency (32 MHz and
43.7 MHz).
 To digitalize and process the IF signal to obtain target and weather information.
CHANNEL 1 CHANNEL 2
SDG MWCG
MWPG
SWR1 SWR2
SDG: Signal Distribution Group
MWCG: Microwave Control Group
CPC1 CPC2
CPC: Central Processor Computer
RXG: Receiver Group
EPG: Exciter and Processor Group RXG1 RXG2

SWR: Switch Router
TTSU: Temperature Sensor Unit
MWPG: MWG Polarizer and Input EPG1 EPG2

RF Switches Power Supply Group
Figure 2.2.5-1. GRPG Elements

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
As can be seen from the previous figure, the GRPG comprises two redundant channels. The sub-
groups, although not redundant, have elements with redundancy.
The following figure shows a diagram with the different subsystems and the signal path.
Figure 2.2.5.1-1. System Block Diagram
The group comprises the following elements:

 SDG: The Signal Distribution Group contains the units that allow system redundancy and the
operative chain control unit.
 MWCG: The Microwave Control Group is responsible for controlling, collecting and reporting MWG
BITE.
 MWPG: The Microwave Power Supply Group is an assembly of two redundant power supplies that
powers the elements of the MWG and antenna polarizer.
 RXG: The Receiver Group is responsible for applying STC curves, guiding signals to stability
monitor and converting the signal received into intermediate frequency.
 EPG: The Exciter and Processor Group contains both the signal generation part (pulse generation)
and the received signal processing part to obtain target and weather information.
 SWR: The Switches/Routers are responsible for the system's communications, both internal and
external.
 CPC: The Central Processor Computer is the system controller. All outside commands pass
through the CPC and it prepares BIT reports for the whole system.
 TTSU: The Temperature Sensor Unit is responsible for monitoring temperature and humidity inside
the GRPG cabinets.
Interconnections between the different sub-groups are shown on the Figure 2.2.5.1-2 in next page:

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
Figure 2.2.5.1-2. GRPG Connections

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
The main characteristics of the GRPG are the following:

 Dual receivers: Redundancy with additional points of redundancy between elements from both
channels.
 Digital receivers: To provide stable operation.
 Seamless beam switching: The four digitalized channels (LOW-TGT, HI-TGT, LOW-WX and HI-
WX) reach the processor and the software selects one of the beams, preventing the blind rings
caused by mechanical switches.
 84dB dynamic range before pulse compression (use of a DDC, Digital Down Converter, after
digitalization).
 Improved clutter rejection, dynamic high-resolution and synchronous clutter map.
 Geocensor Map.
 MTD IV that provides:
 Target detection with Zero Velocity.
 Target detection in adverse weather conditions.
 Target detection in high clutter conditions.
 Three-dimensional resolution (Range, Azimuth and Doppler).
 Programmable filter banks: 6/8 filters (80NM configuration) or 8/10 filters (60NM
configuration).
 Built-in tracker to obtain low False Target Rate.
 High-resolution weather (6 levels standard).
2.2.5.2 Signal Distribution Group (SDG)
Its main functions are:

 To perform switching functions between different groups, both for signal and control purposes.
 To distribute the signal to each active group (selected by the operator or due to a fault).
 To convert the signal and Inductosyn to ACP and ARP synchronisms (only if this is available).
 To send the ACP/ARP signals to the EPG and to the Secondary Radar (by means of an interface
board - ESBB, Encoder Signals Bypass Board - the azimuth synchronism still goes to MSSR when
PSR is switched off).
 To carry out manual/local control of switching if the main control card fails.

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
Figure 2.2.5.2-1. Image of the Elements of the SDG
EPG1/2 EPG1/2
DRCG EPG1 EPG2
EPG1/2
TSU TSU
SDCU
IFCSU
EPG1/2
RXG1/2
AGSU RXG1 RXG2
MWCU
Figure 2.2.5.2-2. Block Diagram of the SDG

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
2.2.5.2.1 POWER SUPPLIES
This is a redundant element of the SDG, i.e. both power supply groups operate at the same time, but if
one fails, the remaining group is able to maintain correct system operation. They provide the direct
current voltages required by the SDG elements. Each group has -15 V, +15 v and +5V power supplies.
Figure 2.2.5.2.1-1. 5V, -15V and 15V Power Supplies
2.2.5.2.2 TURNING SIGNAL UNIT (TSU)
This is a redundant unit, i.e. one of the units is operating (operative unit) while the other remains on
standby (standby unit).
Its main function is to extract ACP and ARP synchronisms received through the interface with the
pedestal and to be the interface between the Encoder and the other units of the system. It also
estimates the turning angle and instant speed of rotation.
Figure 2.2.5.2.2-1. TSU Units

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
2.2.5.2.3 ENCODER SIGNALS BYPASS BOARD (ESBB)
This unit is an interface unit between the DRCG (signals from the encoders) and PSR/SSR systems. It
is placed inside the cabinet, at the back of the SDG.
The ESBB sends the turning signals to both TSU, so the PSR is allowed to use and process the
ACP/ARP signals.
The turning signals are available to the co-mounted secondary radar (if applicable), even when the PSR
is switched off because those signals are sent to the SSR with no adjustment, so both systems can
adjust the north independently.
2.2.5.2.4 GROUP SELECTION
The selection of the active group is done by means of two units in the system, Signal Distribution
Control Unit (SDCU) and Active Group Selection Unit (AGSU).
The AGSU unit is in charge of routing the signals by means of the position of different switches in the
system.
NOTICE
AGSU Unit is for maintenance purposes only, not for normal operation use.
The active group selection can be done in two different ways: Local or Remote. This type of control is
selected by means of a switch in the AGSU card. When the position is Local, the active group is
selected by means of the different switches in front of the AGSU card. If the position is Remote (this is
the normal functional mode), the active group is selected from the CMS through the SDCU Unit.
Figure 2.2.5.2.4-1. SDG Block Diagram Showing SDCU and AGSU Interconnections

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
2.2.5.2.4.1 SDG CONTROL UNIT (SDCU)
The SDCU is the control unit in the Signal Distribution Group. This group is in control of the redundancy,
receiving the information from the EPG about the active channel and sending the commands to every
unit/group, to select the active one in all redundant elements in the GRPG and MWG. In addition, it
collects the BIT from all elements of the rack and reports it to the EPG.
The redundancy of this unit is achieved via the AGSU card, which can be used to manually control
active chain selection (see paragraphs 2.2.5.2.4.2 and 4.3.6).
Figure 2.2.5.2.4.1-1. SDCU Unit
2.2.5.2.4.2 ACTIVE GROUPS SELECTION UNIT (AGSU)
The Active Group Selection Unit is in charge of setting the position of the different switches in the
system, to route the signal and establish the active group.
AGSU is the unit that allows the active chain to be selected if the SDCU fails (Front-End between chains
1 and 2), this means, only maintenance purposes and not for normal operation use. It comprises HW
elements without logic so that a breakdown does not interrupt operation of the system.
Figure 2.2.5.2.4.2-1. AGSU Unit

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
NOTICE
Some consideration have to be taken into account for the use of the AGSU in maintenance tasks:
 Before selection of LOCAL mode in AGSU is advisable to put all the switches selecting the active
group to avoid undesirable and uncontrolled switching of any group/unit.
 When LOCAL mode is selected, the offset applied to the encoder signals is the value indicated in
the internal microswitches of the correspondent TSU depending on the selected Encoder (TSU 1 -
Encoder 1 / TSU 2 - Encoder 2).
NOTICE
Due to the use of the internal offset for encoders, when LOCAL mode is selected the
system will lose radar data til the EPG synchronizes with the new values.
 The use of the AGSU when Automatic switching is selected must be done taking into account the
first point in this list to avoid possible transitorial failures. If that happens:
 Do some manual switching from the AGSU till the system stabilizes the switching of the
groups/units, or
 go back to Remote Control in AGSU to select Manual Switching in the CMS and then select
Local Control again.
NOTICE
In any case is advisable to put all the switches selecting the active group previously
to change the control to Local in the AGSU.
For more information about the operation of AGSU, see paragraph 4.3.6.

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
2.2.5.2.5 INTERMEDIATE FREQUENCY CONTROL SWITCHING UNIT (IFCSU)
This unit is in charge of routing the signals from the RXGs to the EPGs. The signal received by the
system, after being converted to intermediate frequency in the RXGs, reaches the IFCSU and is sent to
the active EPG indicated by the SDCU (or AGSU).
The available combinations are:
 RXG 1 to EPG 1 and RXG 2 to EPG 2.
 RXG 1 to EPG 2 and RXG 2 to EPG 1.
Figure 2.2.5.2.5-1. IFCSU Unit
The unit is composed of four DPDT transfer switches so it is possible to send the signal from either of
the two RXGs to either of the two EPGs. The four switches perform the switchover at the same time to
always send the four signals to the same EPG. The Switches Control signals arrive from the AGSU,
establishing the signal path.
2.2.5.3 MicroWave Control Group (MWCG)

 To control and feed the switches of the MWG by selecting, on the command of the SDCU or
AGSU, the operative MWG.
NOTICE
 To control and feed the MWG programmable attenuators (1st RF STC stage). The attenuators are
independent for each chain, so MWCU 1 controls MWG 1 attenuators and the same idea for chain
2.
 To control and feed the position of the antenna polarizer (in the APG).
 To control the MWG switches through the MWRU.

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
 To control and feed the RFCSU unit, which is located in this group due to the availability of space
in the system but that functionally belongs to the SDG (group responsible for switching tasks).
Figure 2.2.5.3-1. Image of the MWCG Elements
MWG 1/2
RXG 1/2
Figure 2.2.5.3-2. Block Diagram of the MWCG

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
2.2.5.3.1 RADIOFREQUENCY CONTROL SWITCHING UNIT (RFCSU)
This unit is physically located in the MWCG due to a lack of space in the SDG, but functionally it
belongs to SDG as it is responsible for active chain switching functions.
It is the interface between the MWG and RXG. Its main function is to allow switching between the two
MWGs and the two RXGs channels. The switching command is sent by the MWCU. The available
combinations are:
 MWG 1 to RXG 1 and MWG 2 to RXG 2.
 MWG 1 to RXG 2 and MWG 2 to RXG 1.
Figure 2.2.5.3.1-1. RFCSU Unit
There are two RFCSU units in the MWCG, one for low beam signals and the other for high beam
signals. With each of these units, a transition panel acts as the interface between the cables coming
from the MWG and the cables that will guide the signal to the RXG.
The switches SW3 to SW6 will be configured automatically to use the amplifiers only when the unit is
located in the High Beam channel (see Figure 2.2.5.3.1-2), due to the different gain in the MWG for
High Beam and Low Beam channels.
TGT 1 TGT 1
TGT 1 TGT 1
TGT 2 TGT 2
TGT 2 TGT 2
WX 1 WX 1
WX 1 WX 1
WX 2 WX 2 WX 2 WX 2
Figure 2.2.5.3.1-2. RFCSU Logic Diagram for Each Beam

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
2.2.5.3.2 MICROWAVE CONTROL UNIT (MWCU)
The MWCU is the MWCG control board. It controls in real time the different elements that belong to
Microwave Group (MWG), performing the following functions:
 Control and supervision of the radiofrequency switchover of RFCUs units.
 Control and supervision of the coaxial and waveguide switches.
 Control and supervision of the test injection switches.
 Control and supervision of the programmable attenuators in the TGT and WX Channels.
 Supervision of the power supplies and fans in the MWG.
 Control and supervision of the MWRU Unit.
MWCU is a VME redundant board belonging to the MWG. MWCU 1 controls channel 1 of Microwave
Group and MWCU 2 controls channel 2 of Microwave Group. The active unit controls also other
elements such as switches, polarizer, programmable attenuators in the Microwave Group and the other
units in the MWCG as well.
MWCU receives control signals from the SDG Group (positions of the switches) and the EPG, and also
reports all BIT for the MWCG and the MWG.
Figure 2.2.5.3-3. MWCU Interconnection Diagram

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
2.2.5.3.3 MICROWAVE RELAY UNIT (MWRU)
The Microwave Relay Unit (MRU) adapts the status and control signals from the different MWG
switches to the suitable voltage and current levels in each case. The signals over which MWRU acts are
the following:
 Waveguide switches control and status signals.
 Coaxial switches control and status signals.
 Polarizer switches control and status signals.
 Test Injection switches control and status signals.
 RFCSUs switches status signals.
MWRU Unit is controlled by the active MWCU. This unit performs the simultaneous switchover between
1 and 2 reception channels of all four RF signals (High Target, Low Target, High Weather and Low
Weather), and also the polarization selection.
2.2.5.4 MWG, Polarizer and Input RF Switches Power Supply Group (MWPG)
This group consists of two redundant power supplies (MWPS - MWG, Polarizer and Input RF Switches
Power Supply) that provide the necessary 28 V for the MWG and Polarizer switches.
Figure 2.2.5.4-1. MWPG
2.2.5.5 Receiver Group (RXG)

 To provide STC attenuation and IF conversion for both beams of target and weather channels.
 To select duplicate test and oscillator signals coming from the different groups.
 To amplify and filter the signal.
 To select and process transmitted signals coming from the TXG to check stability.
This is a redundant group. The PSR has two independent selectable RXGs.

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
Figure 2.2.5.5-1. Image of the RXG Elements
Figure 2.2.5.5-2. RXG Logic Diagram

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
2.2.5.5.1 EPG AND RXG POWER SUPPLY ASSEMBLY (ERPS)
It is exactly the same as the power supplies of the EPG group.

It provides the necessary voltages for the correct operation of the group: 5 V / 3.3 V / 15 V / 12 V / 5 V.
Figure 2.2.5.5.1-1. ERPS
2.2.5.5.2 TEST INJECTION AND STABILITY MONITORING UNIT (TISMU)
It has two different parts:

 RF: To check stability by sending samples from one of the possible points in the transmitter,
selected by the user, to the processing stage. The obtained value is monitored in the CMS.
 IF: To select the output of the active TXG and send IF test targets to the SRXUs.
Figure 2.2.5.5.2-1. TISMU front Side Connectors

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
2.2.5.5.3 SENSITIVITY TIME CONTROL UNIT (STCU)
Two main functions are available:

 Stability monitoring: One input from TISMU, the transmitted sample through the TISMU is
composed of four parts in order to be injected into the four different channels.
 STC: Main function, attenuation curve application (STC, second RF stage) to the four channels.
Figure 2.2.5.5.3-1. STCU Unit
2.2.5.5.4 RECEIVER GROUP CONTROL UNIT (RGCU)
The active unit (1 or 2) is indicated through the SDG Control Unit (SDCU) in the SDG (see
2.2.5.2.4.1).The RGCU is the RXG control board, and its main functionalities are:
 STCUs control and monitoring: the attenuation curves are stored in two memory banks (RAM), and
are able to be updated with a period greater than one CPI by means of an 11 bit control signal.
 SRXU attenuators control.
 TISMU control and monitoring.
 LOSDU control and monitoring.
 RXG power supplies and fans control and monitoring.
In order to perform the control, RGCU requires synchronisms from the active SYNU, allowing coordinate
operation with the other groups. In addition, it receives control information from the CBU (information
regarding attenuations and switches). The communications with both EPG are performed by
bidirectional serial lines.

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
Figure 2.2.5.5.4-1. RGCU Interconnection Diagram

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
2.2.5.5.5 S-BAND RECEIVER UNIT (SRXU)
The SRXU receives RF signal from STCU and through two mixer stages, it converts the received signal
into a lower Intermediate Frequency (IF). The resultant signal is sent to the next receiver stage, IFCSU,
that distributes the signal to the following group in the receiver chain.
There are 4 SRXU units in the RXG, one for each downlink channel from the antenna (LOW-TGT, HI-
TGT, LOW-WX, HI-WX). All are identical and interchangeable.
The main functions are explained as follows:
 Frequency filtering.
 RF to IF down conversion. The output frequencies are 43.694 MHz and 32.042 MHz.
 Automatic amplification and output signal level adjustment.
 Log video signals generation (output accessible from the SRXU front panel).
 IF test signal injection through the CMS.
To perform down conversion, SRXU requires Local Oscillator signals. These signals come from the
LOSDU, which receives the oscillator signals and distributes them to the SRXUs.
Figure 2.2.5.5.5-1. SRXU Unit

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
2.2.5.5.6 LOCAL OSCILLATORS SWITCHING AND DISTRIBUTION UNIT (LOSDU)
It is responsible for selecting the input from whichever frequency generator in EPG1 or EPG2 is
operative, and for distributing the signals from the STALO (LO1 in RF) and COHO (LO2 in IF) oscillators
between the four SRXUs in the same RXG.
Figure 2.2.5.5.6-1. LOSDU Module Configuration
2.2.5.6 Exciter and Processor Group (EPG)
This is a redundant group within the PSR system. This group has three main functions:
 Frequency Generator Group: Generation of the main radar signals.
 RF transmission signal and RF test signals.
 IF test signals.
 Oscillator signals LO1 and LO2 for frequency conversions.
 Clock signals for signal generation and A/D conversion.
 Synchronizer, Control and BITE Group: Synchronized, control and BITE collect from the different
elements of the system (TXG, MWG, RXG, SDG, MWCG and the EPG itself) and redundancy
management between groups.
 Digital Demodulation and Processing Group: Reception and processing of all signal channels.
 ADC and DDC processes.
 Signal distribution to EPs.
 Signal and data processing.

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
Figure 2.2.5.6-1. EPG Units Distribution
Figure 2.2.5.6-2. Logic Diagram of the EPG

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
2.2.5.6.1 FREQUENCY GENERATOR GROUP (FGG)
Its functions are:

 Generate the transmission signal (a signal with two non-simultaneous diversities), RF and IF test
signals.
Figure 2.2.5.6.1-1. Transmitted Spectrum
 Provide timing oscillator signals to synchronize and convert frequencies.

 Switching between the two FGGs (equivalent to switching between the two EPGs) is controlled by
the SDCU/AGSU.
2.2.5.6.1.1 STABLE OSCILLATOR (STALO)
This unit generates the signal of Local Oscillator LO1, corresponding to a 3300 - 3430 MHz stable
oscillator.
The LO1 value is obtained from a very low phase noise master oscillator (between 103 MHz and 107
2
MHz ) multiplied by 32 and filtered, in order to attenuate the harmonic level, and finally divided into
different paths with an independent gain level depending, if it is sent to SRXU or TXGU.
By means of splitters, the three STALO output are generated: RX 1, RX 2 and TX.
STALO provides, with its BITE information about its output signal level, to the SCBG group.
Figure 2.2.5.6.1.1-1. STALO Unit
2 Notice that the crystal comprises the oscillator and the multiplier as a whole set in case of replacement.

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
2.2.5.6.1.2 COHERENT OSCILLATOR (COHO)
The COHO generates the coherent clocks used in the signal generation and demodulation, and also the
LO2 oscillator used in the signal up conversion in the TXGU and the down conversion in the SRXUs.
COHO provides, with its BITE information about its output signal level, to the SCBG.
The following signals are generated from an adjustable, temperature-compensated, 93.2144 MHz, very
low phase noise master oscillator:
 LO2: 559.28664 MHz Local Oscillator.
 CLK-G: 186.4288 MHz clock signal to DSU.
 CLK-C: 93.2144 MHz clock signal to DRU.
Figure 2.2.5.6.1.2-1. COHO Unit
2.2.5.6.1.3 TRANSMISSION GENERATION UNIT (TXGU)
The TXGU functionality consists of converting the IF frequency from the DSU into RF frequency (up
conversion). The steps to perform the up conversion are explained as follows:
 Amplify the IF input signals from the DSU (digital waveform generator).
Figure 2.2.5.6.1.3-1. Generated Waveform

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
 Send IF test signals to both RXG.

 Convert transmission signals from IF to RF by filtering, amplifying and adjusting, in order to remove
harmonics and spurious signals.
 Generate RF test signals (for the MWG).
TXGU has two signal inputs, F1 and F2, that come from the waveform generator WFG. The input
signals have a band-pass Intermediate Frequency Spectrum, centred in F1=32.0425 MHz and
F2=43.69425 MHz, both with a 1.942 MHz bandwidth.
The TXGU reports BIT related to signal presence with the adequate level for both diversities in IF and in
RF.
Figure 2.2.5.6.1.3-2. TXGU Unit
2.2.5.6.2 SYNCHRONIZER, CONTROL AND BIT GROUP (SCBG)
SCBG consists of digital control boards controlled by process elements where synchronism generation
and control and BITE software is run.
The main functions of the SCBG are as follows:
 Communication with all elements of the EPG. SYNU and CBU do not provide control signals to
elements of the other EPG.
 Control of the waveform to be transmitted (both diversities) and synthesis of the test signals.
 Sends to CPC the status of the elements and groups in the chain controlled by this EPG.
 Communication with both RXG: STCU curves, stability monitoring control, control of SRXU
programmable attenuators, BIT reception.
 All these functions are carried out by the RGCU in the corresponding RXG, which receives the
control signals from the CBU card.
 Communication with SDG: system control signals from CBU.
 EPG sends signals indicating the active EPG.

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
 Control signals to RFCSU switching. In normal mode, the RF output of each MWG channel is
directed to the active RXG, likewise stand-by MWG is connected to stand-by RXG.
 Control signals to IFCSU switching. Establishing the paths from the active RXG to the active
EPG, likewise stand-by RXG is connected to stand-by EPG.
 Communication with TXG: active pre-amplifier control, transmission synchronization, stability
monitoring point control, BIT reception.
 TXG communication is performed via IP over Ethernet directly from the GPB, where the SCP
software runs, and the SYNU, which sends clocks and synchronisms to TXG.
 TXG uses two identical control boards (TXCU). Such controls include: Active Preamplifier
control, transmission synchronization signals, stability monitoring point or BIT reception.
 Communication with APG: reception signals from polarizer.
 Communication with MWG: STC control, active chain selection controlled by CBU.
 Control of system interlocks. In order to do a system shutdown in case of a critical failure in the
transmitter, ventilation failure, high VSWR, etc.
 Distribution of system clocks. SYNU receives the clock signals and distributes them to the system.
DAC1
DAC2
TXGU
DSU
F1_F2
RNG_CLK
MSG_CLK
PRT_STRT
BT_STRT
TX_GATE
CLK_G
TX_GATE
COHO
TEST_GATE
F1_F2
TX_GATE RNG_CLK, MSG_CLK

TRANSMITTER
TX_PULS_LG, TX_PULS_SH
TX_GATE
STALO
PRT_STRT, BT_STRT,
ARP TSU1 TX_GATE, SMU_GATE,
MSG_CLK, RNG_CLK
ACP TSU1 RGCU 1
ARP TSU2 RGCU 2
ACP TSU2 LOCAL_MODE, ACTIVE_EPG,

ACTIVE_RXG, ACTIVE_MWG
SYNU 1 SDCU
BT_STRT
PRT_STRT
DRU
RNG_CLK, MSG_CLK, TX_GATE,
ARP BT_STRT
MWCU 1
ACP
RNG_CLK, MSG_CLK MWCU 2
RNG_CLK, BT_STRT,
MSG_CLK
CBU 1
Figure 2.2.5.6.2-1. System Control and Synchronism Signals

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
2.2.5.6.3 GENERIC PROCESSOR BOARD (GPB)
This is a COTS VME multi-processor board with four processing elements which communicate to each
other through PCI bus and with VxWorks as the operative system. In one of its nodes runs the
Synthesis and Control Process (SCP) or real time system control software.
3
The software is downloaded in each GPB board when the system starts up . This fact allows having
COTS GPB and in case of failure, any of those could be replaced by the spare, without being worried
because of the SW.
The GPB contains a controller to access the VME bus. The SW acts with SYNU and CBU by VME
access. Besides, in one of the PMC slots the DSU element is installed.
Figure 2.2.5.6.3-1. GPB Front
On the other hand, the SCP runs in one of the process elements of the GPB. The main functions of this
software are:
 Synchronized Process Control: Real time software which implies being executed with the highest
priority. It performs the DSU control and management related to signal synthesis and other
synchronism elements in the system (MWG, RXG and DDPG).
 Control command Reception and Attending Process: SCP establishes connections with different
CPC applications in order to receive messages with control communications.
 Configuration/Reconfiguration Process: The execution of this process has assigned a low priority.
Two stages:
 In the start-up/restart process, loading all files required by SCBG.
 In case of a reconfiguration command ordered by CPC sent via LAN, as for example switching
of any redundant element, reconfiguration in any SW parameters or hardware reconfiguration
(STC attenuations etc).
3The software which runs in each GPB is stored in CPC hard disk. CPC is not a COTS; in case of failure, the spare includes all the sw
configuration. Indra will repair the damaged unit and will send it back once fixed with all the SW configuration installed.

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
 Status and BIT reporting process: The status and BIT process establishes a connection to CPC via
LAN in order to send a message with the system status and BITE with a frequency of 1 Hz
approximately.
 Operative chain establishment: SCP commands the redundant elements switching according to
CPC/CMS and system BITE. Once the SDG establishes which EPG has the control, it performs
actions to establish the active chain. Whatever switching performed either by command or by
failure is validated by the SCP and reported.
Other less important processes carried out by SCP are synchronization process by NTP, start-up
process (starting other process) or supervision process (checking operative task status).
2.2.5.6.3.1 DIGITAL SYNTHESIZER UNIT (DSU)
This is a COTS PMC card installed onto a "host" board (GPB). The communication between the DSU
and the host board is carried out by means of a PCI bus interface. Through this interface, the DSU
receives the DC voltage required.
DSU generates the radar transmission and IF test signals by Digital Quadrature Modulation and direct
Digital/Analog conversion to IF. The signals generated will be sent to the TXGU for up conversion.
2.2.5.6.3.2 SYNCHRONIZER UNIT (SYNU)
This unit is responsible for generating all system synchronisms and distributing them to the right
destinations. Its functions are as follows:
 To receive, adjust and distribute azimuth rotation synchronisms.
 To generate relay control signals.
 To generate temporary synchronisms (to CBU, TXG, RGCU, TXCU, STALO, COHO, MWG, DRU,
DSU).
Figure 2.2.5.6.3.2-1. SYNU Unit

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
2.2.5.6.3.3 CONTROL AND BIT UNIT (CBU)
CBU controls and collects BIT from the system in a synchronized manner during operation:
 Transmitter control:
The transmitter control is performed in the board itself. Such control is focused on its own protection, as
VSWR control for example, and in the operative operation. In addition, some other aspects to control
are the active preamplifier, FGG input selection or stability monitoring selection. The elements that are
controlled and monitored in the TXG are:
 Power supplies.
 LEDs.
 Regulators.
 PA on/off.
 BIT request.
 Preamplifier selection.
 Stability monitoring point selection.
 Interlock deactivation.
 DSU control: Software control and set-up.
DSU receives configuration SW in files through SCP access. This file contains the waveform samples,
which are stored in the DSU RAM. At the same time, the DSU receives the synchronisms explained in
2.2.5.6.3.2.
 TXGU control:
Each TXGU is controlled by its associated CBU. The aspects to be controlled are: diversity selection
control, control of signal routing to transmission or test, gain control at different points of the chain and
BITE.
 Polarizer control:
The polarizer control signal, generated in CBU, is sent to the antenna through the MWCU. The control
signal establishes transmission with linear polarization (LP) or circular polarization (CP). Such signal is
defined by a 28 VDC level.
 MWG control:
This control is performed by MWCU. This board receives the control signals for the Receiver Protector
from CBU, MWG channel selection and the RF test selection. The communication between MWCU and
CBU is performed by RS-422 bidirectional interface, through which STC curves are programmed, and
BITE from all elements of MWCG are reported.
 RXG control:
Performed by the RGCU, which receives control signals from CBU. The communication between RGCU
and CBU is performed by RS-422 bidirectional interface. The main control signals:
 Establish the attenuation STC curve.
 Switch selection in the stability monitoring channel.

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
 BIT processing:
CBU collects BIT from all the control boards of each group and the rest of the elements of its group:
RXG, MWG, SDG, FGG and DDPG, and the own CBU. The BITE signals are accumulated in a FIFO in
the CBU, read each beam. The BITE information is sent to CMS with a frequency of 1 Hz
approximately.
Figure 2.2.5.6.3.3-1. CBU Interconnection Diagram
Figure 2.2.5.6.3.3-2. CBU Unit

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
2.2.5.6.4 DIGITAL DEMODULATOR AND PROCESSOR GROUP (DDPG)
This group is in charge of the digital to analog conversion, and demodulation and process of the
received signal. The DDPG consists of two GPB boards with different modules installed on them.
DDPG main functions are:
 Digital to analog conversion and demodulation.
 Signal acquisition.
 Processing of the received signal (independent process for target and weather):
 Signal processing.
 Data processing.
 Send ASTERIX data information to CPC.
Figure 2.2.5.6.4-1. Three GPB Units of the DDPG
2.2.5.6.4.1 Digital Receiver Unit (DRU)
The DRU is a PMC card plugged into one of the GPBs of the DDPG. In one hand, it receives the IF
signals from RXG through IFCSU. On the other hand, clocks, synchronism and control signals are
received from COHO, SYNU and CBU to be able to perform the functionalities assigned.
The main functionalities are listed below:
 DRU receives the IF signals from the SRXU through the IFCSU.
 First stage is digital conversion of each channel. For this purpose, the DRU has four ADCs.

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
 Second stage consists of baseband demodulation performed by a DDC (Digital Down Converter)
controlled by a NCO (Numerically Controlled Oscillator), and ensure I/Q signals have no
unbalances. In the following figure, a DDC diagram has been attached.
Figure 2.2.5.6.4.1-1. DDC Block Diagram
 Third stage is related to marking of samples with azimuth and frequency information.
 After the sample has been marked, it is stored in a buffer waiting to be sent to a process element.
 Besides, the DRU generates the main system clocks: Cell Clock and Message Clock. These clocks
are sent to SYNU and this unit distributes them to the rest of the elements.
Physically, the board is plugged in a GPB located in the EPG.
Figure 2.2.5.6.4.1-2. DSU Location and Connectors Configuration

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
2.2.5.6.4.2 PROCESSING SOFTWARE: SIGNAL AND DATA PROCESSING
Once the signal has been demodulated, these samples are sent to be processed. The process until
weather and target data in ASTERIX format is obtained, is composed of four sub-processes:
 DRP-AD: Acquisition and Distribution.
 DRP-SP: Signal Processing.
 DRP-MM: Map Management.
 DRP-DP: Data Processing.
 DRP-MP: Meteo Process.
These processes run in Process Elements (PEs) in the GPBs. Each GPB board has four PEs (Process
Element). The communication between PEs is carried out by means of a PCI bus.
Each process runs in a PE with the exception of the Signal Processing, which runs in the rest of PEs
(the ones not used by AD, MP, MM or DP).
Figure 2.2.5.6.4.2-1. Round Robin Architecture and Communication between Elements
The first process executed is acquisition and distribution. Signal samples from DRU are sent to AD
process through PCI bus. This process runs in the GPB where DRU is plugged.
Next stage is the Signal Processing (SP) performed in the nodes of the other GPBs according to Round
Robin architecture. The design allows operating without interruption, so at least one PE is ready to
receive data all the time. During Signal Processing, the Map update process is running, which means in
one of the steps in the algorithm of the SP, there is a call to the MM function to send the new
information coming from the zero filter (ZVF) in order to get the updating map.
After the signal processing, the obtained information goes to DP or Data Process node, which runs in
the GPB that contains the DRU.
The MP process is in charge of the weather process in the system, calculating the weather vectors that
will be sent to the ATC.
Finally, the target and weather information is sent to CPC via LAN, thanks to the GEPU board which
allows Ethernet access.

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
2.2.5.7 GRPG Fan Tray (GGFT)
In order to achieve a correct ventilation of GRPG rack, a fan tray is installed at the bottom of each
group.
Figure 2.2.5.7-1. Fan Tray Location in GRPG
In addition, another group of fan trays are installed at the back of the rack, see Figure 2.2.5.7-2.
Figure 2.2.5.7-2. Fan Tray Located at GRPG Back

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
2.2.5.8 Temperature Sensor Unit (TTSU)
This is the temperature-controlling unit inside the GRPG. It comprises the TTSB (Temperature Sensor
Board), which is mounted on a small metal structure that gives it support and allows attachment.
There are two of these units in the PSR. These are located one on either side, inside the cabinets
towards the top.
Figure 2.2.5.8-1. TTSU Located Behind the Fan Tray
The boards that receive the temperature information, store the value received in records that can be
read by the system by making BITE requests. Based on this information, if the temperature becomes
too high, the system itself would detect this and take the necessary actions.
2.2.5.9 Central Processor Computer (CPC)
The CPC is a redundant COTS unit of the PSR system but with factory configuration for system
installation. This performs two types of functions:
1) Functions with restrictive reaction time:

 Control command reception.
 Operating mode management.
 Radar data distribution.
2) Functions with less stringent time restrictions:

 Isolation and failure control.
 SW set-up and maintenance and system configuration.
 Timing synchronization.

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
2.2.5.10 Switch Router (SWR)
This is a redundant element that represents the communications centre of the radar system. It manages
switching between both internal and external networks, sending only applicable messages to each
defined point-to-point line.
Figure 2.2.5.10-1. Switch Router and its Position on the Rack
2.2.6 LAN Network
All the elements contained in the PSR are connected through a LAN network, based on
UDP/IP/Ethernet protocols. Each local site is characterized by a standard IP distribution, so that it can
be easily maintained. An interface diagram of this network distribution is shown in Figure 2.2.6-1.
Figure 2.2.6-1. LAN Network Distribution

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
2.2.7 Control and Monitoring System
The Radar station is fully controlled by using the Control and Monitoring System (CMS). That means the
operational status of the most important devices is shown in a graphical user interface with synoptic
and/or physical diagrams. After a profile-based access control under a Username/Password scheme,
this sub-system allows reconfiguration of the operational parameters of the controlled units.
Control and Monitoring System is designed to provide users with the complete status and control of every
monitored site.
The main features of Control and Monitoring System are:
 Supervision of the status of every element in the site.
 Control of surveillance system, communication and auxiliary systems.
 Audible Acoustic and visual alerts for events taking place on site.
 Graphical tool for the initial configuration of the system.
 Graphical tool to generate events information reports.
The Control and Monitoring System is composed of Local (SLG) and Remote (SRG) workstations.
Figure 2.2.7-1. Communication Architecture

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
2.2.7.1 Local Positions
The SLG constitutes the interface between all the elements in a Radar Station and the Human -
Machine Interface at Radar station site. Master SLG workstation keeps the other SLG and SRG
workstations synchronized to show the same system status everywhere.
Local Positions have the following features:
 Radar Station complete Control and Monitoring capability, from Antenna Drive System to Ancillary
Equipment.
 Top-Down design.
 At least two SLG workstations for full redundancy.
 Hierarchical configuration for avoiding control conflicts.
 Control of each station element by simple click.
 User Access Security:
 User name and password represent an access profile.
 All user actions and events are recorded in a data base.
Figure 2.2.7.1-1. Access to Screen (SLG)

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
2.2.7.2 Remote Positions
The SRG workstation performs Remote Monitoring, Maintenance and Control actions over the Radar
Station from a remote position. It also receives periodic reports and alarm messages from the Radar
Station. In addition, it features the Human-Machine Interface in the Control Centre, managing up to
twenty stations from a Control Centre and continuously showing their status.
In the application main screen, the Radar Stations associated to this centre appear represented by
boxes. Failing subsystems will be displayed in red colour, so that the operator can easily detect where
the failure is.
Remote level
Site level
Sensor level
Figure 2.2.7.2-1. Access to Several Screens (SRG)
Remote Positions have the following features:

 Allows Control and Monitoring for up to 20 stations per SRG.
 At least two SRGs for full redundancy. No limits in SRG positions (neither upper limit nor lower
one). If present, provide real time monitoring of main elements for all stations.
 Access to each station by simple click.
Figure 2.2.7.2-2. Access from SRG to SLG

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
2.2.8 Radar Communications System
The SDCS allows the information interchange in a controlled and selected way between the Radar
System and the Control Centre.
The main functions of the subsystems composing the SDCS are:
 Communication between Radar Site and Control Centre maintenance.
 Other networks interconnection. There are connection between internal LANs of the Radar Site and
Control Centres, and the external network (LAN NETWORK routers and X.25 or HDLC line), and
between synchronous HDLC lines.
 Internal Supervision information diffusion (state, configuration) of SDCS equipment to the rest of
the system (SLGs and SRGs).
 Radar Site information diffusion to the rest of the system.
 External information diffusion inside the Radar Site.
 To optimize and assign priority to messages depending on the communication flow in which
they run.
 To allow bi-directional information flows (from Radar Site to the exterior and vice versa).
 To transfer reading data to emission data, in any direction, with the capability of changing data
protocols or protocol parameters.

 To provide security functions and maintain the independency of the Radar Sites.
 To calculate and provide performance statistics.
 To improve data availability, taking advantage of all the available information without selecting a
particular flow.
 To maintain the set of protocols TCP (RFC 793), UDP (RFC 768), IP (RFC 791), IGMP (RFC
1112), ICMP (RFC 792), ARP (RFC 826), RARP (RFC 826), SNMP (RFC 3411), TELNET (RFC
854), FTP (RFC 959), X.25, HDLC, NTP, SSH and RS-232. The SDCS communications system is
located within a redundant architecture.
The radar station comprises several pieces of equipment, interconnected by two LANs (LAN 1 and LAN
2) acting in parallel and independently. The main function of the SDCS is to exchange radar data with
external positions, and control and monitor data with Remote control and monitoring machine.
Figure 2.2.8-1. SDCS System

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
Figure 2.2.8-2. SDCS Connector
Figure 2.2.8-3. Data flows in the SDCS within a Radar System Via LAN

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
2.3 SYSTEM CHARACTERISTICS
Table 2.3-1. Indra PSR Characteristics Summary
SYSTEM
Frequency 2.7 to 2.9 GHz S Band [PSR_3.2.0_1]
2 frequencies (Long/Short Pulse)
Frequency Diversity 75.7 MHz frequency diversity
Possible exchange of frequencies for subsequent CPI

> 22 kW for 10 PA configuration
Peak Power
> 25 kW for 12 PA configuration
RF Blanking Sectored in azimuth
Detection Range 60 NM (15 rpm), 80 NM (12 rpm) or 100 NM (10rpm)
Up to 1.5:1 without alarms

VSWR
System withstands 3:1 for 3 seconds; if longer time, transmission is inhibited.
RECEIVER
3 stages (2 in RF and 1 in Digital):

- First stage: Mutter for transmission period and first miles. Channel Low
Beam Target: Range 40 dB in steps of 0.156 dB. Channels High Beam
STC
Target and Low and High Beam Weather: Range 32 dB in steps of 0.5 dB.
- Second stage; each channel: Range 63 dB in 0.03 dB steps.
- Third stage (Digital): Minimum threshold for detection
PROCESSING
Type MTD-IV Doppler Filter Bank
Interference Suppression/Detection, G0-CFAR each filter, Synchronous

False Alarm Control Clutter Map, Wind farm mitigation, Geo-censor Map, Clear Day Map, MTAT,
MTAC, Anomalous Propagation Detection
Calibrated 6-level according to US-NWS / ICAO
Weather Type
Doppler filter ground clutter suppression
Remote Control and Monitoring Integrated to system with Graphical user Interface
Capacity > 1200 targets/scan
False Alarms < 10 per scan (at tracker output in normal clutter conditions)

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
3. USER INTERFACE
3.1 INTRODUCTION
See section 2.2.7 for an introduction to the user interface for controlling and monitoring the radar
system.
3.1.1 Definitions
Colour Criteria
The graphic elements that appear in the display follow a colour criteria to show the status and
operating mode. Colours and meaning are as follows:
 Red: Alarm or element with critical fault.
 Orange: Corrupted or slightly degraded element. Not critical fault.
 Green: Correct operation.
 Yellow: Stand-by.
 White: No status communication with the element.
 Blue: Element without available status or not configured.
 Brown: Not applicable subsystem.
 Grey: Disabled element.
Operator Inputs
The user will perform actions on the CMS application screens using the mouse. The nomenclature to be
used for the Mouse buttons is the following:
 LB: Mouse Left Button.
 RB: Mouse Right Button.
User Types
User types or user levels shown in (Table 3.1.1-1) can be accessed in SLG application for the different
systems.
Table 3.1.1-1. Users Types
PROFILE OPERATION
5 Manufacturer.
4 Expert User, Maintenance staff in radar site.
3 Intermediate User.
2 Operation from Tower.
1 Operation from ACC.
0 Any User: Only Supervision; No changes can be entered.

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
3.2 USER INTERFACE DESCRIPTION

In this section, the basic concepts of the inner application are shown, such as screens description,
areas in which they are divided, general functionality of each area, and all that is necessary to
familiarize with the environment in which the application is running and the way data are displayed.
The user interface of the Control and Monitoring System at Sensor level has three parts.
3.2.1 Top Bar
This area has informative and general configuration functions. The Top Bar changes depending on the
level in which the user is navigating.
Figure 3.2.1-1. Top Bar Example
The elements that can be found in the different top bars are:
3.2.1.1 Acoustic Alarm
Enables or disables the acoustic alarm.
Figure 3.2.1.1-1. Acoustic Alarm Button
3.2.1.2 "REPORTS" Button
Used to generate user or alarm reports. See report generation procedures in paragraph 4.4.5.
Figure 3.2.1.2-1. Report Button
3.2.1.3 "FAULTS" Button
Used to show the current faults of the system/subsystem.
Figure 3.2.1.3-1. Faults Button

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
3.2.1.4 Profile Area
It shows the profile of the user and the current control mode (Local or Remote). It allows changing the
user logged in and the control mode. Details about how to log in/out and change the control mode are
in paragraph 4.3.2.
Figure 3.2.1.4-1. Profile Section
3.2.1.5 Last Events Area
It shows information about most recent events that occurred in the subsystem.
Figure 3.2.1.5-1. Last Events Area
Clicking with RB on the message area opens a window displaying the last 100 events (alarms or
actions) in the system.
Clicking with LB on the message area causes the cleaning of this area and a submenu appearing with
the options: CONFIGURATOR, SHUTDOWN and REBOOT:
Figure 3.2.1.5-2. Top Bar LB Menu
Clicking in CONFIGURATOR option launches Configurator application. This application is in charge of

configuration of the Control and Monitoring System. See 3.3.4.5.
Clicking in SHUTDOWN option powers off the Control and Monitoring machine. See section 4.3.4.2.
Clicking in REBOOT option reboots the Control and Monitoring machine. See section 4.3.4.3.
3.2.1.6 Radar Site Name
It shows the site radar name.
Figure 3.2.1.6-1. Radar Site Name

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
3.2.1.7 SLG Operating Mode
It shows the workstation number and the Master/Slave operating mode.
Figure 3.2.1.7-1. SLG Operation Mode
3.2.1.8 SLG/SRG Status
This field is shown in case of SLG operation showing the current status of the SLG, without taking into
account the current subsystem status.
Figure 3.2.1.8-1. SLG Status
Figure 3.2.1.8-2. SRG Status
This field is shown in case of SRG operation showing the current status of the SRG at a time, without
taking into account the current radar site status.
Figure 3.2.1.8-3. SLG/SRG Status
This field is shown in case of SRG operation showing the current status of the SLG and SRG at a
time, without taking into account the current subsystem status and current radar site status
respectively.
3.2.1.9 UTC Time
It shows the current system time in 24-hour format.
Figure 3.2.1.9-1. UTC Time

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
3.2.1.10 Indra Logo
Figure 3.2.1.10-1. Indra Logo
By means of this button, the set of SW versions installed on the workstation is shown on screen.
Figure 3.2.1.10-2. System SW Versions SLG
Figure 3.2.1.10-3. System SW Versions SRG
Clicking on button in the SRG version screen shows the versions of the SLGs of each radar
site monitored by the SRG.

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
3.2.2 Supervision Area
This area is used to navigate hierarchically through the different elements of the radar equipment. This
arrangement of radar elements allows checking the status of every element or group of elements in
the subsystem.
A first level displays the equipment that needs supervision, grouped by general function, i. e., Pedestal
Group and Equipment Room Group. A box colour represents each one of these equipments, and its
status depends on box colour (see paragraph 3.1.1 to see colour criteria).
To know status details on a specific module, clicking on the corresponding box opens a new screen,
showing the elements that it contains. In this new screen, each element or LRU is represented by a box
colour, indicating the status of each element according to the aforementioned criteria.
To go back to the previous window (parent level), a blue box named as the parent level is located in
the upper-right part of the current window; clicking on this box takes the user to the parent level.
Figure 3.2.2-1. Supervision Area
For further details about Supervision Area, see in section 3.3.4.1.1 the supervision area of each
subsystem.

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
3.2.3 Control Area
This area performs the radar configuration facility. It consists of a frame that is composed of several
tabs, sorted by their functionality.
This area is permanently visible while user is in the subsystem Supervision Area. It is independent
from the Supervision Area, so it will be possible to navigate around subsystem equipment in
Supervision Area maintaining on screen a specific tab in Control Area or vice versa. Control Area
appearance is shown in Figure 3.2.3-1.
Figure 3.2.3-1. Example of Control Area
The control capability is managed through a set of user profiles to provide security. There are 6
different user profiles (from 0 to 5). Each profile has different allowance, and permits to configure and
monitor different parameters, so that the amount and significance of the information provided to the
user in each case is controlled.
How to log in is described in 4.3.2.
All the tabs contain four buttons located in the lower area of the screen. These buttons are labelled as
APPLY, CANCEL, PRINT and COPY:
 APPLY (if available): send to the Extractor the changed parameters. The Extractor should
validate all changed parameters. Some parameters are sent to the MEX directly, and it is not
necessary to press apply: parameters of general tab and lists of items type parameters.
 CANCEL (if available): undo all the changes in the current tab.
 PRINT: capture and print the current screen into text format.
 COPY: capture and print the current screen into a text format file. The file is stored in a USB
memory stick.

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
3.3 USER INTERFACE OPERATION
3.3.1 RCMS HMI Operation
3.3.1.1 RCMS General Screen
RCMS main screen in the SRG workstations is composed of two parts:

 Top Bar: This area has informative and general configuration functions.
Figure 3.3.1.1-1. Top Bar - SRG Main Screen
The different areas of this bar are detailed in section 3.2.1.

 Central area: displays the radar sites controlled and monitored from the SRG.
Figure 3.3.1.1-2. SRG Main Screen
From this screen, it can be seen the general status of each radar site and the status of the main
subsystem:
Figure 3.3.1.1-3. Radar Site Status from SRG
The non applicable subsystems are in brown colour.

Clicking LB on a radar site displays the next level of control and monitoring (Site Level) detailed in the
following section, 3.3.1.2.

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
3.3.1.2 Radar Site Screen from RCMS
SRG main screen can be divided into two parts:

 Top Bar
Figure 3.3.1.2-1. Top Bar of Site in SRG

 Supervision area: displays the status of the different subsystems of the site, including the SLGs.
Figure 3.3.1.2-2. Central Area of Site in SRG
The supervision area of SRG is the same as the screen of the corresponding SLG, except for the
status of SLGs and the upper right button to return to SRG main screen. It will be described in SLG
section.

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
Figure 3.3.1.2-3. SLG Status from SLG
This area shows the status of:

 The transmission to the radar site by LAN 1.
 The transmission to the radar site by LAN 2.
 The number of SLGs connected.
3.3.1.3 Subsystem Screen from RCMS
Subsystem screen of SRG can be accessed by LB clicking on the subsystem. It is divided into three
parts:
 Top Bar:
Figure 3.3.1.3-1. Top Bar of Subsystem in SRG

 Supervision area: displays the status of the different elements of the subsystem selected as
detailed in section 3.2.2.
Figure 3.3.1.3-2. Supervision Area of Subsystem

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
In SRG, for the first time the user enters in a subsystem screen, the SRG will request the status of
every element of the subsystem to SLG. The status of the updating will be displayed:
Figure 3.3.1.3-3. Updating Subsystem from SRG
This area depends on the subsystem. The supervision area for a subsystem from SRG is the same as
that from SLG and it will be described for every subsystem in section 3.3.4.1.1.
 Control area:
This area performs the configuration facility of the elements of the selected subsystem. It consists of a
frame that is composed of several tabs, distinguishing them by their functionality. See section 3.2.3 for
more details about this area.
Figure 3.3.1.3-4. Example of Control Area
This area depends on the subsystem The control area for a subsystem from SRG is the same as that
from SLG and it will be described for every subsystem in section 3.2.3.

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
3.3.2 LCMS HMI Operation
3.3.2.1 Site Screen from LCMS
LCMS main screen in the SLG workstations is composed of two parts:

 Top Bar
Figure 3.3.2.1-1. Top Bar of Main Screen in SLG

 Supervision area: displays the status of the different subsystems of the site. It uses schematic
diagrams representing the elements of different Systems. When a subsystem is selected, a new
screen appears. A deeper description of this screen is in section 3.2.2.
Figure 3.3.2.1-2. Central Area of Site in SLG

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
3.3.2.2 Systems Screens from SLG
Systems screens of SLG can be accessed by LB clicking on the system box. The system screen is
divided into three parts:
 Top Bar:
Figure 3.3.2.2-1. Top Bar of System in SLG
 Supervision area: displays the status of the different elements of the subsystem selected as
detailed in section 3.2.2.
Figure 3.3.2.2-2. Supervision Area of System

This area depends on the subsystem. The supervision area for a subsystem from SRG is the same as
that from SLG and it will be described for every system in section 3.2.2.
 Control area:
This area performs the configuration facility of the elements of the selected system. It consists of a
frame that is composed of several tabs, distinguishing them by their functionality. In section 3.2.3 there
are more details about this area.
Figure 3.3.2.2-3. Example of Control Area

This area depends on the subsystem. The control area for a subsystem from SRG is the same as that
from SLG and it will be described for every subsystem in section 3.2.3.

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
3.3.3 User Access
Users in Control and Monitoring System are managed from Configurator application. See sections
3.3.4.5.1 and 3.3.4.5.2.
In the SLG, users are identified by a user name and a subsystem:
Figure 3.3.3-1. Users in SLG
NOTICE
Passwords have been hidden for safety reasons.
Several users can have the same user name if the subsystem allocated is different. Users with the
same user name and different subsystem allocated are different users.
Furthermore, each user has a profile between 1 and 5, an expiration date and a locked status
(expiration date and locked status is optional).
The subsystem is related to the application which the user has access:
 General: Access to Configurator and Report Manager.
 PSR: Access to primary radar.
 SDCS/GSCRM: Access to Radar Communication System.
 RDM: Access to combinator if exists.
 Pedestal: Access to pedestal.
 CNR: Access to CNR.

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
 UCS_Radar: Access to Mode S Interrogator if applicable.

The Profiles indicates the permission that the user has in the corresponding subsystem. The list of the
profiles is in section 3.1.1.
Optionally, the password of the users has to comply with a complexity criterion. The criterion is the
following:
 Length of password between 6 and 15 characters.
 The password should have at least one letter and one number.
Administrator users (profiles 4 or 5 in subsystem General) can see passwords of every user with the
same or lower profile.
If password expiration date function is available, when the date of the password has expired, the user
will be locked in the allocated subsystem. It will be necessary to contact the administrator (profiles 4 or
5 in subsystem General) for changing the password of the locked user. After that, the expiration date
of the user will be set 3 months later from the date of the change. See section 4.4.4.
The CMS will warn the user about the remaining time for password expiration from the 10 previous
days to the expiration:
Figure 3.3.3-2. Remaining time for password expiration
When a user enter user name and password in a subsystem, if the data are not valid, the system will
show a message indicating user/password incorrect:
Figure 3.3.3-3. Wrong User/Password
Optionally, users have 5 wrong attempts for enter a right password in the corresponding application.
After 5 wrong attempts, the system will lock that user. It will be necessary to contact the administrator
(profiles 4 or 5 in subsystem General) for changing the password of the locked user or unlock the
user.
The CMS will warn the user about the locked status by number of attempts:

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
Figure 3.3.3-4. Locked by number of attempts
In the SRG, users are identified by only the user name. There are no subsystems to allocate, so the
profile defines the actions users can handle. This profile is applicable to every application of the SRG.
Figure 3.3.3-5. Users from SRG
NOTICE
The behaviour of the expiration date and the number of attempts described before are applied to SRG
and they are also optional.
NOTICE
Users of SLG and SRG are different and there is not any correspondence.
For further information, see section 4.3.2.

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
3.3.4 Site Systems
The general view of the Radar site shows a box corresponding to each system that can be controlled
and monitored, and their status:
Figure 3.3.4-1. General Radar Site View

The subsystems than can be monitored and controlled are the following:
 Indra PSR.
4
 MSSR/Mode S .
 Pedestal.
5
 Radar Data Merger .
 NTP Servers.
 Switches.
 Radar Communication System.
 Ancillary equipment: these signals are specific for each project.
The top bar description in this level of CMS is detailed in sections 3.2.1 and 3.3.2.2.
In the following sections are described the Control and Monitoring System for each subsystem.
4 Description included in MSSR/Mode S User Manual.

5 Description included in RDM User Manual.

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
3.3.4.1 Indra PSR System
To access Indra PSR system, the following box should be clicked:
Figure 3.3.4.1-1. Access to Indra PSR System
3.3.4.1.1 PSR SUPERVISION AREA
This area consists of the graphical representation of the dual channel status and their subsystems.
Figure 3.3.4.1.1-1. PSR Supervision Area
The status of the following elements is monitored:

 TXG: This area shows the general status of the transmitter, including the PRPA status.
Figure 3.3.4.1.1-2. TXG

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
 GRPG: This area shows the general status of both channels of GRPG and all the subgroups.
Figure 3.3.4.1.1-3. GRPG with all the Subgroups of Both Channels
 MWG: This area shows the general status of the MWG and its redundant channels.
Figure 3.3.4.1.1-4. MWG and its Redundant Channels
 WCD: This area shows the general status of the WCD.
Figure 3.3.4.1.1-5. WCD
 Transmission Status: This area shows the status for transmission signal generation. The colour
criteria is defined in 3.1.1, but only red and green are applicable. The text of the boxes also
changes between TX ON or TX ENA (green colour) and TX OFF or TX DIS (red colour). Three
different status are possible:
 Transmission enabled (generating signal) and transmitter working.
Figure 3.3.4.1.1-6. Transmission Status: Correct
 Transmission enabled (generating signal) but transmitter is not working.
Figure 3.3.4.1.1-7. Transmission Status: No Transmission

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
 Transmission disabled and transmitter not working.
Figure 3.3.4.1.1-8. Transmission Status: No Generation and No Transmission
 Polarization status: This area shows polarization status. There are two possible values: Linear or
Circular. The colour criteria is defined in 3.1.1, but only red and green are applicable. The text of
the boxes also changes between POL CIRCULAR or POL LINEAR in green colour. Red colour is
set when an error in the polarization switch is detected.
Figure 3.3.4.1.1-9. Polarization Status
 Connection between GRPG channels and LANs of the system: This area shows the connection
status between both channels of GRPG and the LAN1 and LAN2 of the system. The colour
criteria is defined in 3.1.1, but only red, white and green are applicable.
Figure 3.3.4.1.1-10. GRPG to LANs
 LAN1 and LAN2 status: This area shows the general status of the LAN1 and LAN2 of the system.
The colour criteria is defined in 3.1.1, but only red and green are applicable.
Figure 3.3.4.1.1-11. LAN1 and LAN2 Status

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
 Data Output status: Represents which radar data output is enabled, as well as the output type
and the type of data that can be chosen on the "General Tab" and "Target Processing Tab" (in
Function Activation Tab) located in the operational parameters area. The selected options are
displayed on the graphic area. Data in white bold means output enabled whereas data in black
means output disabled.
 AST 01: ASTERIX category 1.
 AST 48: ASTERIX category 48.
 LAN: local area network.
 M: Measured plots (Detected).
 C: Calculated tracks (Extrapolated).
 T: Tracks.
Figure 3.3.4.1.1-12. Data Output Status
 Encoder Status: Represents the Encoder status. In green is the one being used by the radar.
Figure 3.3.4.1.1-13. Encoder Status
3.3.4.1.1.1 TXG
The TXG is made up of:

 TXCU (1 and 2), Transmitter Control Unit.
 PRPA (1 and 2), Pre-Amplifiers.
 PA (1 to 10 or 12 depending on Transmitter configuration), Power Amplifier Modules.
 TXBA (1 to 3), Transmitter Blower.
 BPSA (1 to 4), Bulk Power Supply.
 MVPS (1 and 2), Multivoltage Power Supply.

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
By clicking LB on the TXG block in the CMS Main Screen, the following diagram appears. By clicking
LB on the "PSR Main Screen" button of the diagram, the user returns to the main screen.
The colour of the TXG’s elements changes depending on the alarm criteria as described in the 'Status
Indicators’ subsection.
Figure 3.3.4.1.1.1-1. TXG Block Diagram (10 PA configuration)
Figura 3.3.4.1.1.1-2. TXG Block Diagram (12 PA configuration)

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
A lower monitoring level is available, in the TXG status area, for the following units:
 PRPA: By clicking LB on the "PRPA1" or “PRPA2” button of the diagram, the following diagram
appears:
Figure 3.3.4.1.1.1-3. PRPA Block Diagram (Main)
Figure 3.3.4.1.1.1-4. PRPA Block Diagram (Standby)
The new area represents the status of the PAM and control units. The colour of the TXG’s
elements changes depending on the alarm criteria as described in the 'Status Indicators’
subsection.

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
 PA: By clicking LB on each power amplifier button of the diagram,for example “PA1”, the following
diagram appears:
Figure 3.3.4.1.1.1-5. PA Block Diagram
The new area represents the status of the PAMs and control units. The colour of the TXG’s
elements changes depending on the alarm criteria as described in the 'Status Indicators’
subsection.

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
3.3.4.1.1.2 MWG
The MWG is made up of:

 WGHF, Waveguide Harmonic Filter (no BITE information).
 WGD, Waveguide Duplexer (no BITE information).
 WPD, Waveguide Power Load (no BITE information).
 WRP (1 to 2), Waveguide Receiver Protector (redundant element).
 FLU (1 to 2), Filter and LNA Unit (redundant element, no BITE information).
 CoaxS (1 to 3), Coaxial Switch.
 WGS, Waveguide Switch.
 SSA, Shelf Switch Assembly.
 CRCH (1 to 6), Coaxial Receiver Channel (redundant element).
By clicking LB on the MWG block in the CMS Main Screen, the following diagram appears. By clicking
The colour of the MWG’s elements changes depending on the failure criteria as described in the
'Status Indicators’ subsection.
The suffix "_1" or "_2" is referred to channel 1 or 2 in the MWG.
Figure 3.3.4.1.1.2-1. MWG Block Diagram

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
3.3.4.1.1.3 GRPG
The GRPG is composed of the following subsystems:

 SDG, Signal Distribution Group.
 MWCG, Microwave Control Group.
 EPG, Exciter and Processor Group.
 RXG, Receiver Group.
 CPC, Central Processor Computer.
In the following paragraphs, all the subgroups of the GRPG are described.
3.3.4.1.1.4 SDG
The SDG is made up of:

 PSA5V 1 and PSA5V 2, 5V Power Supply 1 and 2 (redundant element).
 PSA15V 1_1 and PSA15V 2_1, +15V Power Supply 1 and 2 (redundant element).
 PSA15V 1_2 and PSA15V 2_2, -15V Power Supply 1 and 2 (redundant element).
 TSU (1 and 2), Turning Signal Unit (redundant element).
 SDCU, SDG Control Unit.
 AGSU, Active Group Selection Unit.
 IFCSU, Intermediate Frequency Control Switching Unit.
By clicking LB on the SDG block in the CMS Main Screen, the following diagram appears. By clicking
The colour of SDG’s elements changes depending on the alarm criteria as described in the 'Status
Figure 3.3.4.1.1.4-1. SDG Block Diagram

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
3.3.4.1.1.5 MWCG
The MWCG is made up of:

 PSA5V 1 and PSA5V 2, 5V Power Supply 1 and 2 (redundant element).
 PSA15V 1_1 and PSA15V 2_1, +15V Power Supply 1 and 2 (redundant element).
 PSA15V 1_2 and PSA15V 2_2, -15V Power Supply 1 and 2 (redundant element).
 MWCU (1 and 2), MWG Control Unit (redundant element).
 MWRU, Microwave Relay Unit.
 RFCSU (HIGH and LOW), Radio Frequency Control Switching Unit.
 MWPS (1 and 2), Microwave Group Power Supply (redundant element).
By clicking LB on the MWCG block in the CMS Main Screen, the following diagram appears. By
clicking LB on the "PSR Main Screen" button of the diagram, the user returns to the main screen.
The colour of the MWCG’s elements changes depending on the alarm criteria as described in the
'Status Indicators’ subsection.
Figure 3.3.4.1.1.5-1. MWCG Block Diagram

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
3.3.4.1.1.6 RXG
The RXG is made up of:

 EPRS, EPG and RXG Power Supply.
 TISMU, Test Injection and Stability Monitoring Unit.
 STCU, Sensitivity Time Control Unit.
 RGCU, RXG Control Unit.
 SRXU (4 units, one per channel), S-Band Receiver Unit.
 LOSDU, Local Oscillators Switching Distribution Unit.
By clicking LB on one of the RXG blocks in the CMS Main Screen, the following diagram appears. By
The colour of the RXG's elements changes depending on the failure criteria as described in the 'Status
Figure 3.3.4.1.1.6-1. RXG Block Diagram

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
3.3.4.1.1.7 EPG
The EPG is made up of:

 EPRS, EPG and RXG Power Supply.
 GPB (1 to 3), General processor Board.
 DSU, Digital Synthesizer Unit.
 DRU, Digital Receiver Unit.
 SYNU, Synchronization Unit.
 CBU, Control and BITE Unit.
 TXGU, Transmission Generation Unit.
 STALO, Stable Local Oscillator.
 COHO, Coherent Oscillator.
By clicking LB on one of the EPG blocks in the CMS Main Screen, the following diagram appears. By
The colour of the EPG's elements changes depending on the failure criteria as described in the 'Status
Figure 3.3.4.1.1.7-1. EPG Block Diagram

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
3.3.4.1.1.8 CPC
The CPC is made up of:

 PRU, Processing Unit.
 DKA, Display and Keyboard Assembly.
By clicking LB on one of the CPC blocks in the CMS Main Screen, the following diagram appears. By
The colour of the CPC's elements changes depending on the failure criteria as described in the 'Status
Figure 3.3.4.1.1.8-1. CPC Block Diagram

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
3.3.4.1.1.9 WCD
The WCD is composed of four alarms:

 Power Fail.
 Humidity.
 Excess Run.
 Low Pressure.
By clicking LB on the WCD block in the CMS Main Screen, the following diagram appears. By clicking
The colour of the WCD elements changes depending on the failure criteria as described in the 'Status
Figure 3.3.4.1.1.9-1. WCD Block Diagram
3.3.4.1.2 PSR CONTROL AREA
PSR Control Area is focused in the control of configurable radar parameters.

Figure 3.3.4.1.2-1 shows PSR Control Area main screen. “General” tab will be shown as selected tab
by default when interrogator initial screen is opened.
Figure 3.3.4.1.2-1. Control Area
In the upper zone of this area, it is possible to select between the parameter tabs of the system (LB
click).

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
3.3.4.1.2.1 GENERAL
When “General' tab is selected in Control Area window, the “General' tab content is shown on screen.
This window is shown in Figure 3.3.4.1.2-1.
Figure 3.3.4.1.2.1-1. General Tab
3.3.4.1.2.1.1 Transmission
The radio button allows to start/stop transmission. When On is selected, the system transmits RF
power, so the echoes from targets are received and processed. When Off is selected, the system
does not transmit RF power, so no echoes from targets are received.
Figure 3.3.4.1.2.1.1-1. Transmission Enable
This parameter is related with the information shown in 3.3.4.1.1 in the Transmission Status.

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
3.3.4.1.2.1.2 Azimuth Adjustment
This frame contains two boxes to introduce the offset for each encoder north adjustment.
 Default Value: 0.000º.
 Range Value: 0.000º to 360.000º.
Figure 3.3.4.1.2.1.2-1. Azimuth Adjustment
3.3.4.1.2.1.3 Operation
This frame contains four parameters:

 Frequency Mode: Selects the frequency mode of operation. There are four possibilities: two for
fixed frequencies (Fixed Long = F1, Short = F2; Fixed Long = F2, Short = F1) and two for
frequency agility (Alternating CPI to CPI; Alternating Scan to Scan).
 Default Value: Fixed Long = F1, Short = F2.
 Polarization Mode: The user can select Linear, Circular or Auto. When Auto is selected, the
polarization will be automatically selected by the PSR depending on the weather detection.
 Default Value: Linear.
 Active Channel Mode: Mode of operation for the active channel. There are three possibilities
(Normal, Test 1 and Test 2). Normal mode is for normal operation. Test modes are for test
purposes only and the system does not give radar data.
 Default Value: Normal.
 Standby Channel Mode: Mode of operation for the standby channel. There are three possibilities
(Normal, Test 1 and Test 2). Normal mode is for normal operation. Test modes are for test
purposes only and the system does not give radar data.
 Default Value: Normal.

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
Figure 3.3.4.1.2.1.3-1. Operation Parameters
3.3.4.1.2.1.4 Clear Day Map Generation
This button starts the Clear Day Map generation in the system.
When the system is generating the CDM, this button remains disabled in order to avoid new
commands during the process. This generation can take several minutes.
Figure 3.3.4.1.2.1.4-1. Clear Day Map Generation

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
3.3.4.1.2.1.5 Active Chain
These radio buttons allow choosing the active element for each redundant one in the system (manual
selection), or setting the automatic selection. The active chain can be a whole channel or a mix
between both of them.
When Manual switching is selected the radiobuttons change to orange colour and the system is shown
in orange colour in the main screen.
NOTICE
The manual selection situation is a degraded situatio because it can provoke data
looses in case of failure.
This frame is disabled when Local is selected in the AGSU Local/Remote switch, avoiding the
possibility to command groups switching in this case.
 Default Value: Channel 1 (manual selection) selected for all groups.
Figure 3.3.4.1.2.1.5-1. Active Chain Selection

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
3.3.4.1.2.1.6 PSR Data Output
The output PSR data is selected by means of the following parameters:

 Plots: If selected, the system output includes Plots.
 Default value: Selected.
 Measured Tracks: If selected, the system output includes measured tracks.
 Extrapolated Tracks: If selected, the system output includes extrapolated tracks.
 Default value: Disabled.
 Weather Activation (Scans): There are four possible values (0: disabled, 6: update each 6 scans,
12: update each 12 scans, 18: update each 18 scans).
 Default value: 6 scans.
This selection affects the elements in the graphical displaying area described in paragraph 3.3.4.1.1.
Figure 3.3.4.1.2.1.6-1. PSR Data Output Selection

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
3.3.4.1.2.1.7 Temperature Values
The values for temperature of the different groups of the PSR System (TXG, GRPG1 and GRPG 2)
are shown in the General tab.
Figure 3.3.4.1.2.1.7-1. Temperature Values
3.3.4.1.2.1.8 SIC/SAC Values
The values for SIC and SAC used by the PSR system are shown in the General tab.
Figure 3.3.4.1.2.1.8-1. SIC/SAC Display

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
3.3.4.1.2.2 TXG TAB
Figure 3.3.4.1.2.2-1. TXG Tab for 10 PAs configuration
Figura 3.3.4.1.2.2-2. TXG Tab for 12 PAs configuration
Each Power Amplifier can be enabled or disabled independently. There is a radio button for each PA
to switch it On or Off.
 Default Value: All On.
3.3.4.1.2.3 PROCESSING PARAMETERS TAB
Figure 3.3.4.1.2.3-1. Processing Parameters Tab

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
The "Available only for Indra staff" parameters are only used by Indra operators during optimization.
Those parameters must not be modified after optimization.
 Sensitivity: Selects the sensitivity level for R-CFAR and Clutter map processing (CM-CFAR) and
it is used to control false alarms. There are 8 predefined levels which are multiplied by the
threshold calculated in each process to modify sensitivity.
Sensitivity could be defined as the minimum threshold for detection; a sensitive system detects
very low level echoes but more false alarms. The lower the value for these parameters is, the
higher sensitivity and the higher possibility of false alarms (due to CFAR, Clutter Map or
Interference).
 Default Value: 3.
 Range: 1 to 8, integer.
Figure 3.3.4.1.2.3-2. Sensitivity
 Effective refraction coindex: Refraction index used in the propagation model.

 Range: 0 to 450, integer.
Figure 3.3.4.1.2.3-3. Effective Refraction

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
 Range offset: To correct the deviation between the detections and the real position (delay on the
transmitted signal, in NM).
 Range: -80 to 80.
Figure 3.3.4.1.2.3-4. Range Offset
 Tracking activation: Enables/disables tracking function.

Figure 3.3.4.1.2.3-5. Tracking Activation

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
 Smooth Plot Position: When this option is enabled, the position reported in the plots will be the
one calculated on the tracking process.
 Default value: Disabled.
Figure 3.3.4.1.2.3-6. Smooth Plot Position.
 ASTERIX output category: Selection of ASTERIX category for output radar data. Possible values:
Cat 34/48 and Cat 1/2. This selection affects the Data Output Status elements described in
3.3.4.1.1.
 Default Value: ASTERIX cat 34/48.
Figure 3.3.4.1.2.3-7. ASTERIX Output Category

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
 Linear to Circular: Limit for automatic switching to circular polarization; Percentage value of range
cells with weather detection.
 Default value: 0.5.
Figure 3.3.4.1.2.3-8. Linear to Circular
 Circular to Linear: Limit for automatic switching to linear polarization; Percentage value of range
cells with weather detection.
 Default value: 0.2
Figure 3.3.4.1.2.3-9. Circular to Linear

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
3.3.4.1.2.4 TEST INJECTION
Figure 3.3.4.1.2.4-1. Test Injection Tab
3.3.4.1.2.4.1 Test Type
Selects the type of the test target to be injected in the system (Analog or Digital).
The frames in the tab change depending on the Test Target Type selected.
Figure 3.3.4.1.2.4.1-1. Test Type Selection: Analog Test Targets Selected
Figure 3.3.4.1.2.4.1-2. Test Type Selection: Digital Test Target Selected

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
3.3.4.1.2.4.2 Injection Control
Selects the channel where the test signal will be injected. There are two buttons for each channel, one
for starting the injection, and the other one to stop the test signal injection.
Figure 3.3.4.1.2.4.2-1. Injection Control
 Test Target Parameters

Depending on the selected type of target, there are some differences in the parameters:
 Injection Type: defines the type of the target to be injected. There are two possibilities (Static
Target and Radial Target).
 Default Value: Static Target.
Figure 3.3.4.1.2.4.2-2. Injection Type

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
 Injection Mode: Addition or Substitution. Enabled only for Digital test targets.
 Default Value: Addition.
Figure 3.3.4.1.2.4.2-3. Injection Mode
 Injection Point: DRC Input (IF) and MWG (RF). Enabled only for Analog test target.
 Default Value: DRC Input (IF).
Figure 3.3.4.1.2.4.2-4. Injection Point

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
 Ring Injection: Injects a ring of test targets. If enabled, the fields Initial Azimuth and Injection
Beams are disabled.
 Default Value: Enabled.
Figure 3.3.4.1.2.4.2-5. Ring Injection
 Initial Azimuth: Azimuth to start test injection.

 Default Value: 0º.
 Range: 0º to 360º.
 Final azimuth: Azimuth to finish test injection.
 Default Value: 0º.
 Range: 0º to 360º.
Figure 3.3.4.1.2.4.2-6. Initial and Final Azimuth

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
 F1 Generation Level: Level in dB for test target, using F1.

 Default Value: -50 dB.
 Range: 0 to -100.
 F2 Generation Level: Level in dB for test target, using F2.
 Default Value: -50 dB.
 Range: 0 to -100.
Figure 3.3.4.1.2.4.2-7. Frequency Generator Level
 Injection Range: Start Distance for the target.

 Default Value: 50 NM.
 Range: 0 to 80 NM.
 End Range: Depends on the Injection Type selected, enabled only for Radial target.
 Default Value: 70 NM.
 Range: 0 to 80 NM.
Figure 3.3.4.1.2.4.2-8. Injection Range and End Range

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
 Radial (Doppler) speed: Doppler speed for test target in m/s.

 Default Value: 200 m/s.
 Range: -420 to 420 m/s.
 Radial (Doppler) speed knots: Doppler speed for test target in knots.
Figure 3.3.4.1.2.4.2-9. Radial Doppler (Speed)
3.3.4.1.2.5 PERMANENT ECHOES TAB
This list allows the user to introduce up to 10 permanent echoes for detection performance. A
permanent echo is a point in the clutter map with high reflectivity.
For each Permanent Echo, the user introduces its azimuth and range, so the process will not reject
them as clutter. There is a checkbox to choose if the selected Permanent Echo is active or not (not
rejected or rejected).
It is possible to Apply a new Permanent Echo, Modify an existent one or Delete any of them.
 Default Value: No echoes.
Figure 3.3.4.1.2.5-1. Permanent Echoes Tab

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
3.3.4.1.2.6 DP REPORT TAB
Figure 3.3.4.1.2.6-1. DP Report Tab
This tab shows some system parameters that allow the user to check the system performance. This
parameters are about the echoes introduced at Permanent Echoes tab.
 Pd: Detection probability.
 Rg Mean Error: Mean Error for calculated range in meters.
 Rg Standard Deviation: Standard Deviation for calculated range in meters.
 Az Mean Error: Mean Error for calculated azimuth in degrees.
 AzDeviation: Standard Deviation for calculated azimuth in degrees.
3.3.4.1.2.7 SP REPORTS TAB
This tab shows some system parameters that allow the user to check the system performance:
 Noise level.
 Relative level for test signals.
 Stability.
 Transmitted Power.
 VSWR at transmitter output.
 VSWR at antenna input.
 Pulse Length.
Figure 3.3.4.1.2.7-1. Reports Tab

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
Figure 3.3.4.1.2.7-2. Reports Tab: Standby Chain
3.3.4.1.2.7.1 Noise Level (dBq)
This frame shows information about noise measurement in every processing channel (target and
weather, both beams and both diversities); in dBq (quantification values).
This frame is present for both active and standby tabs.
Figure 3.3.4.1.2.7.1-1. Noise Level
3.3.4.1.2.7.2 FI Test Relative Level (dB)
This frame shows information about the relative level of the IF test signal used for autotest; in dB.

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
Figure 3.3.4.1.2.7.2-1. FI Test Relative Level
3.3.4.1.2.7.3 RF Test Relative Level (dB)
This frame shows information about the relative level of the RF test signal used for autotest; in dB.
Figure 3.3.4.1.2.7.3-1. RF Test Relative Level

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
3.3.4.1.2.7.4 TX MON Relative Level (dB)
This frame shows information about the relative level of the signal for transmitter monitoring signal
used for autotest; in dB.
This frame is present only for active tab.
Figure 3.3.4.1.2.7.4-1. Tx Mon Relative Level
3.3.4.1.2.7.5 FI Test Stability (dB)
This frame shows information about the stability level of the IF test signal used for autotest; in dB.
Figure 3.3.4.1.2.7.5-1 FI Test Stability

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
3.3.4.1.2.7.6 RF Test Stability (dB)
This frame shows information about the stability level of the RF test signal used for autotest; in dB.
Figure 3.3.4.1.2.7.6-1. RF Test Stability
3.3.4.1.2.7.7 TX MON Stability (dB)
This frame shows information about the stability level of the signal for transmitter monitoring signal
used for autotest; in dB.
This frame is present only for active tab.
Figure 3.3.4.1.2.7.7-1. Tx Mon Stability

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
3.3.4.1.2.7.8 TX Monitoring Point
It is possible to select the signal test point among three values:

 TXG Input: The stability is measured with TXG input signal (before amplification).
 PRPA output: The stability is measured at the output of the PRPA.
 TXG Output: The stability is measured at the end of the amplification chain.
 Default Value: TXG Input.
Figure 3.3.4.1.2.7.8-1. Tx Monitoring Point
3.3.4.1.2.7.9 TXG/MWG Measurements
This frame shows different parameters:

 Tx Power (dBm): Transmitted power in dBm. Minimum value shall be 72,83 dBm with the system
working correctly.
 VSWR TXG: VSWR at the output of the transmitter. Shall be lower than 1.4.
 VSWR Antenna: VSWR at the output of the MWG. Shall be lower than 1.4.
 Pulse length: Shows the measured pulse length in microseconds.

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
Figure 3.3.4.1.2.7.9-1. TXG/MWG Measurements
3.3.4.1.2.8 MAPS APPLICATION TAB
Figure 3.3.4.1.2.8-1. Maps Application Tab
This tab allows application of configuration maps to configure the PSR system.
The radio button selects the type of map to be applied. There are 6 possibilities (Tracking zones,
Blanking, Digital STC, STC, Receiver states and Site Environment). Next to each radio button there is
a box showing the currently applied map for each type.
When a type of map is selected, the list on the right shows all the possible files to apply after clicking
the general Apply button. The box over the list shows the path where those files are. The box below
shows the selected map on the list.
The button Apply Map inside the frame sends the selected file to the radar.

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
3.3.4.2 Pedestal
To access the Pedestal subsystem, the following box in Radar Site screen should be clicked:
Figure 3.3.4.2-1. Access to Pedestal Subsystem
CMS of the system can integrate the control and monitoring of the pedestal subsystem into the
local/remote management.
The graphic interface is composed of buttons, edition fields and graphics, allowing the control and
visualization of the parameters in a quick and comfortable way.
Figure 3.3.4.2-2. Pedestal User Interface
The graphic interface can be divided into three parts:

 Top bar.
 Supervision Area.
 Control area.

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
3.3.4.2.1 TOP BAR
This bar includes data about profile, control, system messages, master/slave condition, SLG/SRG
identification, system time and Indra logo.
See sections 3.3.1.3 and 3.3.2.2 for more details about the function of the top bar.
3.3.4.2.2 PEDESTAL SUPERVISION AREA
The pedestal elements shown in the graphic interface are the following:
Figure 3.3.4.2.2-1. Supervision Area of Pedestal
The meaning of the colours are detailed in 3.1.1.

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
The elements graphically represented and shown in the graphic area are:
Table 3.3.4.2.2-1. Graphical Elements
GRAPHICAL ELEMENTS
(1) System Status Shows if the system is ready to operate or not.

(2) Encoder Status Shows if the encoders are switched ON or OFF
(3) Control Mode Shows the actual control mode of the pedestal system.
(4) Interlock Chain Shows if there is any interlock open.
(5) Drive 1 Status Shows possible failure in the Motor/Drive 1.
(6) Drive 2 Status Shows possible failure in the Motor/Drive 2.
(7) Motor 1 Status Shows if the motor 1 is running or stopped.
(8) Motor 2 Status Shows if the motor 2 is running or stopped.
(9) Clutch 1 Status This sign appears when the motor 1 clutch is disengaged.
(10) Clutch 2 Status This sign appears when the motor 2 clutch is disengaged.
(11) Sump Oil Level Shows Oil level status.
(12) Obstruction Lights This sign appears when the obstruction lights are ON.
(13) Antenna Turning Status Shows if the antenna is turning or stopped.
(14) SLG Main Screen LB on this button exits the Pedestal application and returns to the SLG Main Screen.
(15) Motor 2 Heater Shows if the Motor 2 Heater is switched ON
(16) Motor 1 Heater Shows if the Motor 1 Heater is switched ON
3.3.4.2.2.1 SYSTEM STATUS
The general system status is shown by means of the graphic element (1).
When a failure occurs in the system, it will be indicated in red in the System Ready box. In this case, it
means that the system needs to be reset.
Once the system is rearmed with the key in the DRCG panel, it will be prepared again for normal
functionality and will be indicated in green in the System Ready box.
When the control is Local, because that position is selected in the DRCG Panel key, in rearming the
system, the operator must turn the key to the OFF position and then turn it again to the desired
position (LOCAL, MAINTENANCE or REMOTE).
When the control is Remote, the system will rearm itself automatically, thus it is not necessary for the
operator to turn the DRCG Panel Key.
Table 3.3.4.2.2.1-1. System Status
SYSTEM READY System Ready for normal operation
The system needs to be rearmed from the DRCG panel key if the control is Local, or it will rearm
SYSTEM READY
automatically if the control is Remote.

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
3.3.4.2.2.2 ENCODER STATUS
The encoder status is shown by means of the graphic element (2).

Each encoder can be switched on or off. The status of each encoder is represented by means of these
graphic elements.
Table 3.3.4.2.2.2-1. Encoder Status
ENCODER 2 ON
Encoder 1 and 2 are switched on.
ENCODER 1 ON
ENCODER 1 ON
Encoder 1 is switched on and encoder 2 is switched off. This status is considered as degraded working of
the system, and this alarm will also be represented in orange in the pedestal box of the CMS main screen.
ENCODER 2 OFF
ENCODER 1 OFF
Encoder 1 is switched off and encoder 2 is switched on. This status is considered as degraded working of
the system, and this alarm will also be represented in orange in the pedestal box of the CMS main screen.
ENCODER 2 ON
ENCODER 1 OFF Encoder 1 and 2 are switched off. This status is considered as a critical failure in the system because the
radar does not have angular information. This alarm will also be represented with red colour in the
ENCODER 2 OFF pedestal box of the CMS main screen.
3.3.4.2.2.3 CONTROL MODE
The control mode is shown by means of the graphic element (3).

There are four possible control mode status in the system as shown in the following table.
Table 3.3.4.2.2.3-1. Control Mode
The system control is switched off. In this position, it is impossible to command the
antenna to turn from any possible control sources (DRCG panel, PLCP Panel or
Control Mode: OFF Pedestal CMS in the CMS). After the activation of any emergency interlock, if the
control type is local, it is necessary to rearm the system turning the DRCG panel key
to the Control Mode OFF position.
Control Mode: Maintenance The system must be controlled by means of the PLCP Panel. There is no other
control possible, neither the DRCG panel nor the CMS.
Control Mode: Local The system must be controlled by means of the controls and buttons in the DRCG
panel. The actions carried out from the CMS will not cause effect in the system.
The system must be controlled from the Pedestal management application in the
Control Mode: Remote CMS. The actions carried out from the DRCG panel will not cause effect in the
system.
Control mode: ERROR When there is incoherence in the control mode detected, the system will turn the
control mode box to red and with the text "ERROR".

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
3.3.4.2.2.4 INTERLOCK CHAIN
The interlock chain status is shown by means of the graphic element (4). It represents the interlock
chain in the system. If all the interlocks are closed (normal operation), the box that represents each
one is shown in green. However, if any interlock is closed (failure in the system), the correspondent
box is shown in red. This is a critical failure because this implies that the antenna has stopped, thus it
is shown in red in the pedestal box in the CMS main screen.
Figure 3.3.4.2.2.4-1. Interlock Chain in Normal Operation
Figure 3.3.4.2.2.4-2. Interlock Chain Open Example
As an option, depending on the customer needs, the interlock chain can include an additional element
for the Hatch as can be seen in the following figure.
Figure 3.3.4.2.2.4-3. Interlock Chain in Normal Operation with Hatch
3.3.4.2.2.5 DRIVE STATUS
The status of both drives is shown by means of the graphic elements (5) and (6).
When there is a failure in the drive, the alarm will appear in this area. If the alarm is not present, the
box disappears.
The possible alarms monitored are listed in Table 3.3.4.2.2.5-1:
Table 3.3.4.2.2.5-1. Drive Status
CONTROLLER 1 FAILURE Failure in the pedestal inverter inside the DRCG Subsystem.
MOTOR1 OVERTEMP ALARM High temperature problem in the Motor.
MOTOR 1 OVERCURRENT ALARM High current consumption problem in the Motor 1.
GEARBOX 1 OIL LEVEL Low oil level in motor 1 gearbox.
MOTOR 1 DRIVING FAILURE Failure in the movement transmission from the motor to the antenna.
In the previous table are the alarms for Drive 1 (element (5)). Same alarms are presented for Drive 2
(element (6)).

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
3.3.4.2.2.6 MOTOR STATUS
The state of both motors is shown by means of the graphical elements (7) and (8). They indicate if the
motors are running or stopped. When the motors are running, it is indicated in green and with the text
"MOTOR 1 ON" and /or "MOTOR 2 ON". When the motors are stopped, it is indicated in orange and
with the text "MOTOR 1 OFF" and /or "MOTOR 2 OFF".
If one of the motors is stopped, it is considered that the system is working in a degraded way, so the
pedestal box in the CMS main screen is orange.
If both motors are stopped, the antenna will be stopped and the radar will stop the RF transmission.
This situation is represented in the CMS main screen with the pedestal box in red.
Figure 3.3.4.2.2.6-1. Possible Motor States
3.3.4.2.2.7 CLUTCH STATUS
The status of both clutches is shown by means of the graphical elements (9) and (10).
Each motor is equipped with a clutch to enable/disable the movement transmission to the pinions. It is
possible to disengage the clutches, so the movement is not transmitted. If both clutches are
disengaged, the antenna will be stopped.
When a clutch is disengaged, a red box sign appears to indicate the problem.
Table 3.3.4.2.2.7-1. Clutch Status
CLUTCH 1 DISENGAGED Motor 1 clutch is disengaged.
CLUTCH 2 DISENGAGED Motor 2 clutch is disengaged.

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
3.3.4.2.2.8 SUMP STATUS
The sump status is shown by means of the graphic element (11).

The oil level and temperature are monitored in the sump. Also, it shows when the sump heaters are
automatically switched on once the temperature is under a certain level.
When the temperature and oil level are normal or the heaters are off, the signs disappear.
Table 3.3.4.2.2.8-1. Sump Status
SUMP OIL LEVEL Critical oil level in the sump. This situation is dangerous for the pedestal integrity.
3.3.4.2.2.9 OBSTRUCTION LIGHTS
The obstruction lights status is shown by means of the graphic element (12).
When obstruction lights are installed, they are controlled by means of the switch in the DRCG front
panel or by means of a crepuscular sensor.
Table 3.3.4.2.2.9-1. Obstruction Lights
When the obstructions lights are ON, it is indicated in the Pedestal CMS by
OBSTRUCTION LIGHTS ON
means of the sign. When the lights are off, the sign disappears
3.3.4.2.2.10 ANTENNA TURNING STATUS
The antenna turning status is shown by means of the graphic element (13).
The antenna turning status is shown with a green sign with the text "ANTENNA TURNING", or a red
sign with the text "ANTENNA STOPPED".
Table 3.3.4.2.2.10-1. Antenna Turning Status
ANTENNA TURNING The antenna is turning.
The antenna is stopped. The red colour indicates a critical failure in the system. This alarm will
ANTENA STOPPED
also be represented in red in the pedestal box of the CMS main screen.
3.3.4.2.2.11 CMS MAIN SCREEN BUTTON
Clicking LB in the graphic element (14) quits the CMS Pedestal application and returns to the CMS
main screen.

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
3.3.4.2.3 PEDESTAL CONTROL AREA
This area is located in the lower part of the screen and allows configuring the pedestal equipment.
The buttons located in this zone show some special information about the system and allow the motor
operation to be controlled. The elements of this area are:
Figure 3.3.4.2.3-1. Pedestal Control Area

There are value parameters and control parameters.
 Value parameters for Motor 1 and Motor 2 are only read values. The user can obtain information
about the motor status by means of these values:
 Power: The power consumption of the motor in kW.
 Current: The current consumption of the motor in Amperes.
 Torque: The percentage of nominal torque value used in the motor.
 Speed: The motor contribution to the antenna speed.
 In normal operation, both motors have the same speed that is equal to the antenna
speed.
 Vibration: The motor vibration measured with a sensor optionally installed in each motor.
Only applicable if sensor installed.
 Control parameters. Here, the operator can operate both motors:
 Motor 1 (2) ON:
 Pressing ON Button, Motor 1 (2) starts to work.
 Both Motors ON
 Pressing "BOTH MOTORS ON" Button, both motors start to work.
 Motor 1 (2) OFF
 When OFF Button is pressed, a confirmation window appears:
Figura 3.3.4.2.3-2. Confirmation window

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
 Pressing "Accept" Button stops Motor 1 (2) and the window closes.
 Pressing "Cancel" closes the window without any action.
NOTE: If one motor is already stopped and the user stops the other motor, the command
will stop antenna rotation.
 Both Motors OFF

 When "BOTH MOTORS OFF" Button is pressed, a confirmation window appears:
Figura 3.3.4.2.3-3. Confirmation window
 Pressing "Accept" Button stops both motors and the window closes.
 Pressing "Cancel" closes the window without any action.
NOTE: This command stops both motors. That will cause the antenna to stop and no more
targets will be received.
3.3.4.3 NTP Server System
There are two ways to configure the parameters of the NTP Timeserver Clock Unit: Local Mode &
Remote Mode.
 Local Mode:
 Used during the first time that the clock is put into operation.
 Keys and display are located on the clock front panel.
Figure 3.3.4.3-1. Keys and Display on the Front Panel

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
 The user must use those keys to configure the NTP Timeserver Clock Unit.
 Below is an example of the screens and options displayed on the LCD menu of the NTP
equipment:
Figure 3.3.4.3-2. NTP Configuration Tree
The options to be configured in the menu and their values are the following:
 REFERENCE TIME.
 SETUP OUTPUTS.
 ENABLE OUTPUTS
 SERIAL → always.
 PULSES → always.
 SERIAL OUTPUTS
 SETUP COM 0 → 9600 701.
 MODE → per second.
 STRING COM 0 → RACAL.
 SETUP COM 1 → 9600 701.
 MODE → per second.
 STRING COM 1 → RACAL.

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
 TIME SERVICE
 LOCAL STRATUM → 1.
 NETWORK
 GLOBAL Cfg.
 HOSTNAME → lantime L1 or lantime L2 (depending on the channel configured).
 DOMAIN → Meinberg.de.
 NAME SRV → 0.0.0.0.
 SYSLOG → 0.0.0.0
 NETW. LED:
 ETH0 → x
 INTERFACES
 IPV4 PARAMETER:
 ETH0.
 DHCP → Disabled.
 ADDR → 214.25.250.80 or 214.25.249.80 (depending on the channel configured).
 NETMASK → 255.255.255.0
 DEF. GATEWAY → 0.0.0.0.
 LINK MODE → Autosensing.
 SERVICES
 SSH → on.
 FTP → on.
 TELN → on.
 SNMP → on.
 Ipv6 → on.
 HTTP → on.
 HTTPS → on.
 NETB → on.
 SYSTEM
 SET TIME ZONE
 SAVING OFF → UTC +00:00.
 SAVING ON → UTC +00:00.
 After configuring all the parameters, the text "Please Wait" will be displayed on the LCD
screen.
 For changes to take effect, user must restart the NTP by pressing the power button on the
rear panel of the NTP equipment.
 To switch on the NTP, user must press the same power button.

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
 Remote Mode:
 Computer connected to an Ethernet port of the Clock Unit via LAN.
 By clicking over NTP server box on the main screen 3.3.2, the application shows the following
screen:
Figure 3.3.4.3-3. Access to Remote Switch Configuration
Figure 3.3.4.3-4. NTP Server Screen
 Access through a web browser, via HTTP or HTTPS, putting the corresponding IP address
of the Clock Unit.
 User name (root) and password (timeserver).
Figure 3.3.4.3-5. NTP Webserver Logging Access

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
 After logging on the main screen, the user can configure the parameters on the NTP
Timeserver Clock unit.
 This access from the CMS contains the "Lantime configuration utility", with the information
window and the Function buttons to access to the Configuration & Management areas.
Figure 3.3.4.3-6. Lantime Configuration Utility Area
 From the Configuration & Management areas, it is possible to configure and change the
configuration options set with Local Mode.
 The different Configuration & Management areas are the following:

 Ethernet.
Figure 3.3.4.3-7. Ethernet Configuration Area

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
 Notification
Figure 3.3.4.3-8. Notification Management Area
 Security
Figure 3.3.4.3-9. Security Management Area

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
 NTP
Figure 3.3.4.3-10. NTP Area
 Local
Figure 3.3.4.3-11. Local Configuration Area

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
 Statistics
Figure 3.3.4.3-12. Statistics Area
 Manual: Shows the manufacturer´s manual.

 Logout: Exits the system.
 Every time the user makes and saves a configuration change from the web interface, the
system automatically restarts to apply the changes, so maybe the NTP can appear without
LAN connection on the main screen of the CMS.

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
3.3.4.4 PPI Radar Data Display
A Plan Position Indicator (PPI) application is installed in CMS and SRG workstation for maintenance
purposes.
The PPI application runs under the CMS application, and therefore under SRG. It may display, record
and reproduce synthetic data from radar with PPI display (Polar Position).
Figure 3.3.4.4-1. PPI Application
 Upper Area Bar
Figure 3.3.4.4-2. Upper Area Bar (CMS)
Figure 3.3.4.4-3. Upper Area Bar (SRG)
This area is composed of tabs "File", "Filter", "Range", "Maps", "View", "Options", INDRA logo with
version information, shortcut keys to menus, CMS overall status and return button. In case of SRG
machines, it includes the name of Radar Location just next to the LAN 2 button. In addition, the overall
status indicator is composed of two blocks, to show the general state of the SRG application, besides
the status of the CMS application.

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
 Central Area: Shows the map and a graphical representation of the targets.
Figure 3.3.4.4-4. PPI Central Area
 Lower Bar Area
Figure 3.3.4.4-5. Lower Bar Area
The bottom bar displays information about coordinates of the cursor, LAD (Line Azimuth Distance),
antenna angle, time, plots and tracks.

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
3.3.4.4.1 OPERATOR INPUTS
The operator will take action on PPI by using the Keyboard and Mouse.
The user can enter data in different ways and do this in many cases through a selection window:
Figure 3.3.4.4.1-1. Examples of Data Selection Windows
These selection Windows are formed by some areas:

 A list of values or selections.
 An editing area of numerical value (may not be present).
 A zone consisting of several check-boxes.
In the selection window, the operator may click with LB on the desired value of the list, or enter the
desired numerical value on the editing area.
3.3.4.4.2 GENERAL ACTIONS ON WINDOW
On one or more windows, the following actions can be done:

 Window Selection:
Featuring multiple windows open, you can select one of them with LB on the edge of the desired use,
which means that the activities on the keyboard will affect only this window, and it becomes visible
above the others.
 Window relocation
A selected window will be relocated by the following procedures:
 Pressing with the LB on the edge of it and, holding down the button, scroll to the desired
position.
 Select the window. Press ALT + F7. Move the mouse to the selected location. Click LB on
the chosen area.

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
3.3.4.4.3 UPPER BAR AREA
The upper zone consists of the following tabs:

1. File
 Return to CMS.
2. Filter
 Label Filter.
 Radar Data Filter.
3. Range
 4 NM.
 8 NM.
 16 NM.
 32 NM.
 64 NM.
 128 NM.
 256 NM.
 512 NM.
4. Maps
 Map1.
 Geo Reference Map.
5. View
 Control SCANs.
6. Options
 Sweeping.
 NM/Meter.
 LAN1: Operating Port.
 LAN2: Operating Port.
 LAN1: No Operating Port.
 LAN2: No Operating Port.
7. Radar name indicative zone (only exists if the equipment is SRG).
8. Return button.
9. Indicative overall CMS (CMS equipment) or SLG / SRG (SRG equipment).
10. INDRA logo, with version information.
11. Shortcut buttons to the tabs functionality.
12. UTC time.
13. LAN operative information.

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
Figure 3.3.4.4.3-1. Upper Bar Area (SLG)
Figure 3.3.4.4.3-2. Upper Bar Area (SRG)
The following sections describe in detail each of the tabs and buttons that make up the upper bar.
The upper bar can be customized by clicking with RB on it and selecting the options you want to
display.
Figure 3.3.4.4.3-3. Upper Bar Personalization
3.3.4.4.3.1 RETURN
This button is used to close PPI application and return to the overall application CMS.
Figure 3.3.4.4.3.1-1. Return Buttons Access
3.3.4.4.3.2 FILTER
Clicking with LB on FilterLabel Filter or FilterRadar Data Filter provides access to the filter
selection window to apply the labels and radar data.
Figure 3.3.4.4.3.2-1. “Label Filter” and “Radar Data Filter” Windows Access
Figure 3.3.4.4.3.2-2. “Label Filter” and “Radar Data Filter” Windows

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
Label Filter Window: Allows change in the tag values of the plot painted on the PPI.
 Ident Airplane: Show/hide the aircraft identity.
 A Code.
 C Code.
 Airplane Address: Show/hide the aircraft direction.
 Number of Replies: Show/hide the number of replies.
 UTC Time: Show time.
 Track Number.
 Speed.
 Orientation.
3.3.4.4.3.3 RANGE
By clicking with the LB on this tab, it opens a menu where the user can choose the resolution in the
layout he wants, with the limited range between 4 and 512 NM. Depending on the range selected, the
window expands or shrinks. The lower the selected range, the higher the resolution displayed.
Figure 3.3.4.4.3.3-1. Scope Button Access

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
3.3.4.4.3.4 MAPS
By clicking with LB on the Map button, it opens a drop down menu that shows the possible maps that
the user can choose from to represent on screen. To select the desired map, you must click with LB
on the map name to be displayed. When a map is selected, the map icon in the upper bar appears
pressed.
Figure 3.3.4.4.3.4-1. Maps Button Access
Figure 3.3.4.4.3.4-2. Geo Reference Map
3.3.4.4.3.5 VIEW
By clicking on this tab and selecting "Control scans, you can reach the window SCANS Control",
where you can set the number of historical plots.
Figure 3.3.4.4.3.5-1. Control Scans Access Window
Figure 3.3.4.4.3.5-2. Scans Control Window

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
3.3.4.4.3.6 OPTIONS
From the options menu, the tabs Sweeping, NM/Meter, LAN 1/LAN2: Operating Port can be accessed.
 Sweeping: Line to display the radar scan.
Figure 3.3.4.4.3.6-1. Sweeping
 NM/Meter: To switch the units of measurement between nautical miles and meters.
 LAN1: Operating Port: Select the LAN 1 network as ASTERIX data entry. The LAN selected
appears in the central area of the upper bar.
Figure 3.3.4.4.3.6-2. LAN1 Operative
 LAN2: Operating Port: Select the LAN 2 network as ASTERIX data entry. The LAN selected
appears in the central area of the upper bar.
Figure 3.3.4.4.3.6-3. Options Menu Access

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
3.3.4.4.3.7 VERSION
If you click with LB on the logo INDRA, the system displays a pop-up with the release of the PPI
application.
Figure 3.3.4.4.3.7-1. Access Window Version
Figure 3.3.4.4.3.7-2. Version Window
3.3.4.4.3.8 TIME
Allows switching between UTC and local time of the system.
Figure 3.3.4.4.3.8-1. UTC and Local Time
3.3.4.4.3.9 RADAR NAME INDICATIVE AREA
This zone only exists in the PPI applications that are installed on a SRG equipment, and its function is
to present on the screen the name of the radar that the user has selected.
Figure 3.3.4.4.3.9-1. Radar Name Indicative Area

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
3.3.4.4.3.10 GENERAL STATUS SLG, SLG/SRG
This indicator shows the overall state in which the application SLG is (and SRG in case that the
equipment is SRG), and depending on this state, the indicator colour varies:
 GREEN: The state of the applications is OK.
 RED: One or more applications has critical failure.
 ORANGE: State in one or more applications degraded / non-critical failure.
 WHITE: Undetected state of other applications.
Figure 3.3.4.4.3.10-1. Indicative Zone of CMS General State
Figure 3.3.4.4.3.10-2. Indicative Zone of CMS/SRG General State
3.3.4.4.4 LOWER ZONE BUTTONS
The bottom button bar is composed of the following fields:

 Cursor coordinates.
 L.A.D. (Line Azimuth Distance)
 Antenna angle.
 Time.
 Plots.
 Tracks.
3.3.4.4.4.1 CURSOR COORDINATES
Displays the coordinates in meters or nautical miles of the mouse cursor on the display of radar data.
Figure 3.3.4.4.4.1-1. Cursor

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
3.3.4.4.5 LINE AZIMUTH DISTANCE
A LAD is a line indicating the Azimuth and Distance.

To create the desired LAD, you must follow two simple steps:
 Press the CTR and, without releasing it, click with the mouse LB anywhere on the screen. This is
the origin of the LAD.
 Click with mouse LB on the desired end point. The LAD will be generated and kept until you clear
presentation.
Figure 3.3.4.4.5-1. LAD on PPI Presentation
Figure 3.3.4.4.5-2. LAD Information
3.3.4.4.6 ANTENNA ANGLE
Displays information about the period of the radar antenna.
Figure 3.3.4.4.6-1. Radar Antenna Period
3.3.4.4.7 TIME
Displays the current system UTC.
Figure 3.3.4.4.7-1. Current UTC System

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
3.3.4.4.8 PLOTS
Number of current plots in the presentation.
Figure 3.3.4.4.8-1. PLOTS Number
3.3.4.4.9 TRACKS
Number of current tracks in the presentation.
Figure 3.3.4.4.9-1. TRACKS Number
3.3.4.4.10 DATA DISPLAY AREA
This area shows the representation of radar data that are selected (LAN 1, LAN2).
Figure 3.3.4.4.10-1. Data Display Area
Through the tabs “Label Filter" and "Data Filter" are determined the labels and radar data to apply.

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
Figure 3.3.4.4.10-2. "Label Filter" Window
 Label Filter:
 Ident Airplane: Shows/Hides the identity of the aircraft (call sign).
 A Code: A Code.
 C Code: C Code.
 Airplane Address: Shows/Hides the direction of aircraft (ICAO address).
 Number of Replies: Shows/Hides the number of replies.
 UTC Time: Displays the data reception time.
 Track number: Shows/hides track number.
 Speed: Aircraft speed.
Figure 3.3.4.4.10-3. "Data Filter" Window

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
 Data Filter:
 Selected Codes: Select a certain code A.
 Ranges: Determines the radar scope.
 Code Types: Code Types (A, C).
 Report Type: Type of report.
By clicking with the LB on a plot, a window pop-up appears with information from the selected aircraft.
Figure 3.3.4.4.10-4. Selected Plot
Figure 3.3.4.4.10-5. Selected Plot Information

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
3.3.4.5 Control and Monitoring System Configuration
The Control and Monitoring System can be configured from an application named "Configurator". This
application is accessed by LB clicking in the Last Event area in the Top Bar (see section 3.2.1):
Figure 3.3.4.5-1. Top Bar LB Menu
If the user chooses the Configurator option, a window appears asking for the user validation.
Figure 3.3.4.5-2. Log-in Window
Once the user has introduced the correct user and password, the Configurator window is opened and
the user can establish all the parameters and configurations of the SLG or SRG.
The Configurator application is not the same in the SLG and SRG.

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
3.3.4.5.1 SLG CONFIGURATOR
Figure 3.3.4.5.1-1. SLG Configurator

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
3.3.4.5.1.1 MENU BAR
 File: Open the following actions list:

 Save to DB.
 Reload Last Saved.
 Save Configuration to USB.
 Load Configuration from USB.
 Exit.
Those SLG parameters and configurations are recorded in a USB.
 Save to DB.
It saves internally a copy of the parameters and configuration. The system will ask for the
application of changes performed.
Figure 3.3.4.5.1.1-1. Configurator Apply changes
 Reload last saved

It reverts the changes and configures the system with the last configuration saved to DB
(previous option).
The system will ask if the user really wants to revert the changes:
Figure 3.3.4.5.1.1-2. Configurator Revert changes

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
 Save Configuration to USB
Figure 3.3.4.5.1.1-3. Save Configuration to USB Option
Displays the following window, where it is possible to set the data to mount the USB and
save the configuration before clicking on the "Accept" button.
Figure 3.3.4.5.1.1-4. Save Configuration to USB Window
 Load Configuration from USB

This option allows loading from a USB device a configuration previously saved.
Figure 3.3.4.5.1.1-5. Load Configuration from USB
Displays the following window, where it is possible to mount the USB and load the file that
contains the configuration saved before clicking on the "Accept" button.

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
Figure 3.3.4.5.1.1-6. Load Configuration from USB Window
 Exit
The Configurator application will be closed. The system will ask if the user wants to apply the
changes done.
Figure 3.3.4.5.1.1-7. Configurator Apply Changes
 Help
 About
This menu displays information about the version of Configurator application:
Figure 3.3.4.5.1.1-8. Configurator. Help
The user has to click in Accept button to exit the help window.

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
3.3.4.5.1.2 GENERAL BUTTONS
In the lowest part of the Configurator window, there are five buttons common in each tab of
Configurator application:
Figure 3.3.4.5.1.2-1. Configurator SLG. Common Buttons
 Print: Print the current tab.

 Copy: Copy a screenshot of the current tab in a USB.
 Revert: Revert the changes done since the last time the changes were applied.
 Apply: The changes are not really done until this button is clicked.
 Exit: Close the application.
3.3.4.5.1.3 GENERAL TAB
Figure 3.3.4.5.1.3-1. Configurator SLG. General Tab

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
This tab is divided into three areas:

 Management System General Data.
Figure 3.3.4.5.1.3-2. Configurator SLG. General Tab. Management System General Data
From this area, the name of the site and the language of the Site are configured.
 Subsystems Management.
Figure 3.3.4.5.1.3-3. Configurator SLG. General Tab. Management Subsystem
From this area, the subsystems that the CMS has to control and monitor are configured. The
configuration allows enabling, disabling and choosing the model of each possible subsystem.

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
Figure 3.3.4.5.1.3-4. Configurator SLG. General Tab. User Management
From this area, a user with profile 5 will be able to create, delete and modify users. Also if possible, to
change the password of the users.
3.3.4.5.1.4 COMMUNICATIONS TAB
Figure 3.3.4.5.1.4-1. Configurator SLG. Communications Tab

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
This tab is divided into three areas:

 Centralized management.
From this tab, the IP addresses of the SLG machines are configured:
Figure 3.3.4.5.1.4-2. Configurator. Communications. SLGs IP Addresses

 Internal management
From this tab, the multicast IP addresses for internal control and monitoring data distribution by both
LANs are configured.
Figure 3.3.4.5.1.4-3. Configurator. Communications. Internal Management
 External management
From this tab, the multicast IP addresses for external control and monitoring data distribution by both
LANs are configured. This flow will be sent to SRG by the Radar Communication System.
Figure 3.3.4.5.1.4-4. Configurator. Communications. External Management

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
3.3.4.5.2 SRG CONFIGURATOR
Figure 3.3.4.5.2-1. SRG Configurator
3.3.4.5.2.1 MENU
The options in the Menu of Configurator application in the SRG are the same as in the SLG. The only
difference is that the configuration and parameters loaded and saved are SRG configuration and
parameters instead of SLG configuration and parameters. See section 3.3.4.5.1.1.
3.3.4.5.2.2 GENERAL BUTTONS
See section 3.3.4.5.1.2.

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
3.3.4.5.3 SRG GENERAL TAB
Figure 3.3.4.5.3-1. SRG General Tab
This tab is composed of:

 Options
From this area, the following parameters are configured:
 Synchronize time with SLG: The time of SRG will be synchronized with the SLG time.
 Site Language: Set the language of the SRG.
Figure 3.3.4.5.3-2. Configurator. General SRG Tab. Options

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
 Route List:
From this area, it is possible to en-route the management data received by the SRG to other IP
addresses.
Figure 3.3.4.5.3-3. Configurator. General SRG Tab. Route List
 Users Management:
From this area, a user with profile 5 will be able to create, delete and modify SRG users. Also if
possible, to change the password of the users.
Figure 3.3.4.5.3-4. Configurator. General SRG Tab. User Management

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
3.3.4.5.3.1 SITES TAB
Figure 3.3.4.5.3.1-1. Configurator. Sites Tab
From this tab, new radar sites can be managed. It can be divided into the following areas:
 Sites:
In this area are defined a list of possible radar sites to be controlled and monitored. It is necessary to
fill all the data of the site to be added to the list. These sites will not be controlled and monitored until
they are added to communication area.

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
 Communications:
In this area, the radar site to be controlled and monitored are defined:
 Site area: This area shows the radar sites that are currently being controlled and monitored.
To add a new radar site, the user should click in "New" button and choose a radar site from
the list with the available radar sites (previously added to Sites area).
Figure 3.3.4.5.3.1-2. Configurator. Sites Tab. Site
 Communications for each site: To finish properly the creation of a new radar site, it is
necessary to configure its communication parameters.
Figure 3.3.4.5.3.1-3. Configurator. Sites Tab. Communications

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
These parameters are:

 Rx ASTERIX: IP multicast and port to receive the ASTERIX data through LAN 1 and
LAN 2.
 Rx Management 1: IP multicast and port to receive the control and monitoring data of
the radar system (CNR elements not included) through LAN 1 and LAN 2.
 Rx Management 2: Auxiliary IP multicast and port to receive the control and monitoring
data. This element is not normally used.
 Rx Management 3: Auxiliary IP multicast and port to receive the control and monitoring
data. This element is not normally used.
 Rx Maintenance 1: IP multicast and port to receive the control and monitoring data of
CNR element through LAN 1 and LAN 2.
 Rx Maintenance 2: Auxiliary IP multicast and port to receive the control and monitoring
data of CNR element. This element is not normally used.
 Rx Maintenance 3: Auxiliary IP multicast and port to receive the control and monitoring
data of CNR element. This element is not normally used.
 Tx. To CR: IP multicast and port to send control and monitoring data from SRG to
Radar Site.
 SCRM/SDCS IP: external IP of the Radar Communication System.
3.3.4.6 Reports Manager
The Report Manager application allows generating a wide variety of reports concerning alarms and
user actions, which are registered in the system.
To access the Reports Manager application, user has to select "REPORTS" button in the Top Bar.
(See Figure 3.3.4.6-1).
Figure 3.3.4.6-1. "Reports" button

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
Once this button is pressed, the interface shown in Figure 3.3.4.6-2 appears on screen.
Figure 3.3.4.6-2. SLG Reports Manager Window
The Report Manager application displays three different zones:

 Top information zone:
Figure 3.3.4.6-3. Reports manager - Top information Zone
 The left zone gives information on the application itself: Name of the application, application
version and Site.
 The central zone prints information about the user: User's name, its profile and its type.
 The right zone shows INDRA logo, the date and time of the system.

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
 Central zone:
Figure 3.3.4.6-4. Reports Manager - Central Zone
The central zone contains a series of tabs that represent the applications or subsystems that
generate events (alarms and user actions). A list that contains all the reports that have been
created previously appears as well. On the right, a column with the following actions is presented:
Open, Copy, Delete, Rename and New.Each one of the applications that can produce user
actions and alarms is represented in each one of the tabs that appear in the central zone of the
"Report Manager", including the "MISCELLANEOUS" tab, which gives access to a variety of
stored mixed information, including alarms or user actions of more than one application
simultaneously.
Figure 3.3.4.6-5. Reports Manager - Central Zone tabs
The reports that have been created previously are located in the corresponding tab and they are
shown in the corresponding text field. The files are presented showing their names, date and time
of their last modification, and their size in bytes.

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
Figure 3.3.4.6-6. Reports Manager - Central Zone Files area
Next to the list of reports, there are 5 buttons: Open, Copy, Delete, Rename and New.
 Open button: allows the visualization of the selected report out of the list. Profile 0 is enough
to open a report.
The application that is required to visualize one report depends on the extension that the file
has (gedit for .txt, Acrobat Reader for .pdf and Mozilla Firefox for.html).
Figure 3.3.4.6-7. Reports Manager - Open Report button
 Copy button: allows the copy of the report selected in the list to an USB device. Profile 0 is
enough to copy a report.
Figure 3.3.4.6-8. Reports Manager - Copy Report button
The following window appears when user selects "Copy" option:
Figure 3.3.4.6-9. Copy Report - USB Copy window

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
 Delete button: this is used to delete the report selected in the list. Profile 0 is enough to
delete a report.
Figure 3.3.4.6-10. Reports Manager - Delete Report button
Once the profile is acquired (if done), the following window appears on screen to confirm the
deletion of the report.
Figure 3.3.4.6-11. Delete Report - Confirmation window
 Rename button: allows changing the name of the report selected in the list.
Figure 3.3.4.6-12. Reports Manager - Rename Report button
In order to execute this action it is necessary to acquire higher profile level. Once user has
logged in, the following window is shown:
Figure 3.3.4.6-13. Rename Report - New name window
User can only write the name of the report.

The allowed characters are: any alphanumeric character and the symbols “_”, “-”, “.”.
The new name must have a maximum length of 10 characters.
 New button: allows creating new reports. In order to perform this action, user must acquire
the appropriate profile. Once the profile is taken, a window that allows the creation of a new
report appears; this window, is shown different in local workstations and in remote
workstations.
Figure 3.3.4.6-14. Reports Manager - New Report button

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
Figure 3.3.4.6-15. New Report Window
This window presents four different sections:

 Report Type.
 Application/Equipment.
 Time Period.
 Output File parameters.

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
Report Type: The first zone is dedicated to the selection of the report type that the user wants to
create.
Figure 3.3.4.6-16. New Report - Report Type Section
Three types can be chosen:

 User actions: user can create a report with just user actions information from the application/s
selected.
 Alarms: user can create a report with just alarms from the application/s selected.
 Statistics: user can create a statistics reports with just the alarms of the application/s selected.
Some applications establish the difference between the beginning from an alarm and its recovery. In
this case these applications keep two messages. For example: “LAN 1 Fallen” and “Recovery: LAN 1
Fallen".
Therefore when selecting Alarms or Statistics, user may create a filter to see only the alarms, only the
recoveries or both simultaneously.
Figure 3.3.4.6-17. New Report - Report Type and Alarm Type section
If the type of selected report is User Actions, the use of the filter is not allowed.
Figure 3.3.4.6-18. New Report - User Actions Selection
When the New Report window appears, options by default are "Alarms" and "All".

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
Application / Equipment: This area is shown different according to the CMS level where the Reports
Manager application was accessed (SRG, SLG, etc).
Figure 3.3.4.6-19. New Report - Application / Equipment
This zone allows selecting the application/s that user wants to make the report about. The applications
listed (tree form) are according to the CMS level where the reports manager is accessed and to the
type of report selected as well.
 If the type is User Actions, the tree presents those applications that have user actions defined.
 If the type is Statistics or Alarms, the tree represents those applications that can cause alarms on
the system.
The tree does not show just the applications, but also the subsystems in which the applications are
divided, and their corresponding alarms or user actions.
This way it is possible to create a report with the alarms or user actions affecting an application, to
create a report on the occurrences of a specific alarm or user action, or a report of an application
subsystem, etc.
User can create a new report of all the alarms that have occurred in an application, or even a new
report of the alarms during a certain period of time. This is done by selecting time interval or not.
Time Period: Selects the period of time that will be included in the report information.
Figure 3.3.4.6-20. New Report - Time Period
If the "See All" option is selected, the interval selection window gets inhibited.

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
However, if the chosen option is "Choose an Interval", the interval selection parameters will be active.
By means of those, user can set the interval: writing it, using the combo-box menus, or selecting the
date with the "Cal" (calendar) button.
Figure 3.3.4.6-21. New Report - Time interval area
Figure 3.3.4.6-22. New Report - Calendar for Interval area
Output File: The last zone is the one corresponding to the output file format, where user can select
the output file format and write the name of the file.
Figure 3.3.4.6-23. New Report - Output file area
By default, the selected option is PDF extension.

 Clean button: When user selects the Clean button, this window returns to its initial state, with all
the text fields cleared.
Figure 3.3.4.6-24. New Report - Clean button

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
 In the lower part of the window, there are the two buttons Generate and Cancel.
Figure 3.3.4.6-25. New Report - Generate and Cancel buttons
Pressing Cancel the screen is closed and it returns to the main screen; pressing Generate all the
entered data are verified and the report is generated.
If there are any mistakes in the introduction of data, the corresponding error message is shown and
user is returned to the New Report window to correct the error.
If there is less than 10% of hard disk capacity available, a warning message will be shown and the
report will not be created.
If there is no error, the corresponding report is generated.
3.3.4.7 Radar Communication System
To access the Radar Communication System, the following box in Radar Site screen should be
clicked:
Figure 3.3.4.7-1. Access to Radar Communication System
The graphic interface is composed of buttons, edition fields, graphic windows, etc. that allow setting
the adequate configuration in a fast and easy way.
The SDCS management applications have the same user interface and the basic elements are
common.

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
Figure 3.3.4.7-2. General Screen
The graphic interface is composed of three parts:

 Top bar.
 Supervision Area.
 Control area.
3.3.4.7.1 TOP BAR
This bar includes data about profile, control, system messages, master/slave condition, SLG/SRG
identification, system time and Indra logo.
Figure 3.3.4.7.1-1. Top Bar
See section 3.2.1 for more details about the function of the top bar.

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
3.3.4.7.2 SUPERVISION AREA
Monitor is the central area on screen and shows the architecture of the system (X.25 or LAN network);
it is composed of several components such as SDCS, LAN networks, Serial networks, ASTERIX traffic
delays and CMS main screen access.
Figure 3.3.4.7.2-1. External LAN Architecture
Figure 3.3.4.7.2-2. Supervision Area with Serial Architecture

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
Monitor is coded using the following colour criterion:
 LAN Networks:
 Red: Bad operation.
 Green: Operation is correct.
 White: There is no signal.
 Main Serial Line (X.25/HDLC):

 Red: Bad operation.
 Green: Operation is correct.
 Secondary Serial Line (HDLC):

 Red: Bad operation or communication error through the interface.
 Green: Correct link in the interface.
 Brown: Interface not active.
 SDCS Equipment
 Red: Bad operation, internal failure of the SDCS application.
 Orange: Degraded operation (failure in one of the LAN interfaces) or “Forced mode”
selected.
 Green: Correct operation, interfaces and SDCS equipment.
 White: There is no signal received, total loss of connection with SDCS equipment. The
SDCS application is not running correctly or there is no signal over any of its interfaces.
 Brown: “Blocked” equipment by another management application (GestApp) or “Inhibited”
equipment.

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
3.3.4.7.2.1 ASTERIX TRAFFIC DELAYS
Figure 3.3.4.7.2.1-1. ASTERIX Delays in LAN Configuration
Figure 3.3.4.7.2.1-2. ASTERIX Delays in Serial Line Configuration
ASTERIX delays show the delays of the ASTERIX data corresponding to each SDCS, according to
the following colour criteria:
 Delays shown in green: Correct data delays for ASTERIX information.
 Delays shown in orange: Degraded data delays for ASTERIX information.
 Delays shown in red: Critical data delays for ASTERIX information.
NOTE: These areas with degraded or critical delays have configurable time periods.
3.3.4.7.2.2 SLG MAIN SCREEN
Figure 3.3.4.7.2.2-1. SLG Main Screen
Pressing with left mouse button over this field shows the main window of the SLG.

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
3.3.4.7.2.3 SYSTEM MONITORING
System may be configured by a serial communication network X.25 or by an external local area
network. In the figure below is shown the architecture based on external local area network.
Figure 3.3.4.7.2.3-1. Supervision Area with External LAN Configuration
Figure 3.3.4.7.2.3-2. Supervision Area with Serial Architecture
Every element in the display is coded with the colour criterion detailed previously.

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
3.3.4.7.3 CONTROL AREA
This area is located in the lower part of the screen and allows configuring the SDCS equipment. The
available tabs are:
 General.
 Flows.
 Interfaces LAN.
 Statistics.
 AST Statistics.
 SDCS Versions.
Figure 3.3.4.7.3-1. Tabs
In the lowest part of the configuration area, there are four buttons that are common to all the tabs, and
that provide the possibility of:
 Apply: Confirm the changes selected in the current tab. This is only applicable to the “Serial
Interfaces” tab.
 Cancel: Cancel the changes selected. This is only applicable to the “Serial Interfaces” tab.
 Print: Print the data contained in the active window.
 Copy: Copy the data contained in the active window in an external USB drive.

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
3.3.4.7.3.1 GENERAL
Figure 3.3.4.7.3.1-1. General
This tab allows changing the generic operational parameters of each SDCS. For each SDCS (it is
indicated which SDCS is being configured in the upper left corner of the frame), the following
configuration options are available:
Table 3.3.4.7.3.1-1. General
COMMAND ACTION
Main Selects the Main mode for SDCS.

Operation Mode
Forced Selects the Forced mode for SDCS.
Active Selects the Active state for SDCS.

State
Inhibited Selects the Inhibited state for SDCS.
Last Reset - Indicates the Time and Date of the latest reset performed.
Write on USB - Copies the SDCS configuration to an external USB drive.
Read from USB - Reads the SDCS configuration from an external USB drive.
Remote Connection - Opens a remote terminal for SDCS.
Reset - Restarts the SDCS application of the selected equipment.
For LAN architecture, there are two SDCSs. For Serial Line architecture, there are four SDCSs.
NOTE: Commands “Write on USB”, “Read from USB” and “Remote Connection” are only available
from the physical position where the SDCS is located, that is, these operations are available
for local SDCS when the actions are taken from SLG.

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
3.3.4.7.3.2 FLOWS
Figure 3.3.4.7.3.2-1. Flows
This tab includes all the available options relative to the flows management.
3.3.4.7.3.2.1 SDCS Selection
This frame selects which of the SDCSs available is monitored, to see its associated flows.
Figure 3.3.4.7.3.2.1-1. SDCS Selection for LAN Architecture
Figure 3.3.4.7.3.2.1-2. SDCS Selection for Serial Line Architecture

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
3.3.4.7.3.2.2 Mode Selection
This frame allows selecting which mode is going to be monitored, to see its associated flows.
Figure 3.3.4.7.3.2.2-1. Mode Selection
3.3.4.7.3.2.3 Flow Configuration
The different flows can be managed (created, modified and/or erased) from this tab. In the central list,
the current available flows are shown.
If one flow is selected out of the list, the lower fields show its associated information.
Figure 3.3.4.7.3.2.3-1. Flow Configuration
NOTE: The amount of inputs and outputs is according to the installed hardware.
3.3.4.7.3.2.3.1 Delete and Modify One Flow
These buttons, located in the right part of the tab, allows deleting and modifying the selected flow.
Figure 3.3.4.7.3.2.3.1-1. Delete and Modify

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
To delete one particular flow, user must select it with mouse left button click and select “Delete”. A
pop-up window will be shown requesting for confirmation; once confirmed, the flow will be erased.
To modify one flow, user must configure the following fields once selected one particular field. After
performing the changes, user must confirm them pressing mouse left button over “Modify”.
Figure 3.3.4.7.3.2.3.1-2. Detailed Values for One Input
3.3.4.7.3.2.3.2 Create a New flow

The creation of a new flow is similar to the modification of an existing flow, but in this case, the flow to
be configured is an empty one.
Each kind of input/output has some particular parameters according to the selection made in “Type”
field.
 X.25 type (only available in case of serial line architecture).
 LAN type.
 HDLC type (only available in case of serial line architecture).

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
3.3.4.7.3.2.3.3 Input/Output Configuration

The chart below shows the different values relating the configuration of an input/output.
Table 3.3.4.7.3.2.3.3-1. Detailed Values of a Flow
COMMON PARAMETERS
Command Action
Name - Establish the name associated to the flow.
Priority - Establish the priority associated to the flow (‘1’ is the highest one).
LAN_X LAN Input/Output (It is indicated which LAN line it refers to).
Type X.25 X.25 Input/Output (only available in case of serial line architecture).
HDLC HDLC Input/Output (only available in case of serial line architecture).
LAN INPUT/OUTPUT
Command Action
Interface - Input/Output IP Address.
TCP TCP Protocol.

Protocol
UDP UDP Protocol.
Port 2000~65535 Reception port. Valid values between 2000 and 65535.
X.25 INPUT/OUTPUT
Command Action
N/A
HDLC INPUT/OUTPUT
Command Action
N/A

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
3.3.4.7.3.3 INTERFACES LAN
Figure 3.3.4.7.3.3-1. Network Interfaces
This tab allows configuring every parameter relating the network interfaces.
This frame allows displaying the particular SDCS whose network interfaces configuration is going to
be monitored.
Figure 3.3.4.7.3.3.1-1. SDCS Selection for LAN Configuration

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
3.3.4.7.3.3.2 IP Configuration
This tab allows displaying the network interfaces configuration for each SDCS (IP Address, Network
mask, etc.).
Figure 3.3.4.7.3.3.2-1. IP Configuration
It also displays the IP address associated to the dual SDCS by means of the “SDCS Partner IP
Address”, in case that the system is to be configured in “Master/Slave” mode (only one out of the two
SDCS will write on LAN lines).
Figure 3.3.4.7.3.3.2-2. SDCS Partner IP Address
3.3.4.7.3.4 Serial Interface
Figure 3.3.4.7.3.4-1. Serial Interface
From this tab, serial interfaces existing in the system can be configured.
NOTE: This tab is not available if there isn't any serial line interface in the system.

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
3.3.4.7.3.4.2 Serial Line Configuration
This area displays the available interfaces in the SDCS and the defined parameters.
3.3.4.7.3.4.2.1 HDLC Serial Line
From this area, the configuration parameters of a HDLC serial line can be modified.
Figure 3.3.4.7.3.4.2.1-1. HDLC Serial Line Configuration
The configurable parameters available for HDLC lines are shown in the following table:

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
Table 3.3.4.7.3.4.2.1-1. Configuration Values for HDLC Serial Lines
PARAMETER DESCRIPTION
Serial Interface - HW serial interfaces available and not allocated to other serial interfaces.
9600, 19200, 38400,...,

Speed List that shows the available speeds.
4096000, 8192000
V.35 Physical interface V.35
Physical interface V.24 Physical interface V.24
X.21 Physical interface X.21
Internal The clock is configured as internal.

Clock
External The clock is configured as external.
3.3.4.7.3.4.2.2 X.25 Serial Line

From this area, the configuration parameters of a X.25 serial line can be modified.
Figure 3.3.4.7.3.4.2.2-1. X.25 Serial Line Configuration

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
The configurable parameters available for X.25 lines are shown in the following table:
Table 3.3.4.7.3.4.2.2-1. Configuration Values for X.25 Serial Lines
Serial Interface - HW serial interfaces available and not allocated to other serial interfaces.
Speed 9600, 19200, 38400,... List that shows the available speeds.
V.35 Physical interface V.35
Physical interface V.24 Physical interface V.24
X.21 Physical interface X.21
Internal The clock is configured as internal.

Clock
External The clock is configured as external.
In addition to these parameters, the configuration of a X.25 serial line has other detailed parameters
than can be configured by clicking on X.25 conf button.
3.3.4.7.3.4.2.2.1 X.25 Parameters
From this area, several parameters of X.25 serial line can be shown and modified.
Figure 3.3.4.7.3.4.2.2.1-1. X.25 Parameters
 Interface X.25
Figure 3.3.4.7.3.4.2.2.1-2. X.25 Interface

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
The parameters that can be modified are shown in the following table:
Table 3.3.4.7.3.4.2.2.1-1. Interface X.25 Parameters
LEVEL 2
DTE Level 2 terminal type DTE

Terminal Type
DCE Level 2 terminal type DCE
Module 9, 128 Level 2 Module
1-7 with module 8, 1–127 with

Window Level 2 transmission window
module 128
Packet Size 16, 32, ... , 2048, 4096 Packet size in RX
LEVEL 3
DTE Level 3 terminal type DTE
Terminal Type DCE Level 3 terminal type DCE
DXE Level 3 terminal type DXE
Module 9, 128 Level 3 Module
1-7 with module 8, 1–127 with

Windows Level 3 transmission window
module 128
Packet Size 16, 32, ... , 2048, 4096 Packet size in RX
COUNTERS
N2 - Number of attempts after which the status of the link changes.
T1 - Period value T1 in millisecond
Number of attempts to retransmit a Reject packet before resetting the virtual

Clock -
circuit.

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
 Virtual Channels
Figure 3.3.4.7.3.4.2.2.1-3. Virtual Channels
The parameters that can be modified are shown in the following table:
Table 3.3.4.7.3.4.2.2.1-2. Virtual Channel Parameters
Num. Virtual C. 1-100 Maximum number of virtual channels that can be used
Num. VC Minimum - Minimum number of virtual channels
Num. CV - Virtual channel number selected
Name - Virtual channel name selected
To carry out a modification in a virtual channel, it is only necessary to select the virtual channel in the
list, change the desired parameter and click on "Modify". If the user wants to discard the changes, he
should click on "Cancel".
3.3.4.7.3.5 STATISTICS
Figure 3.3.4.7.3.5-1. Statistics

This tab shows all the traffic statistics associated to each flow specified for each mode.

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
3.3.4.7.3.5.1 SDCS Selection and Flow Selection
The left frame within this tab is used to select SDCS, Mode, Flow and refresh time, whose statistics
are going to be displayed.
Figure 3.3.4.7.3.5.1-1. SDCS and Flow Selection for LAN Configuration
Figure 3.3.4.7.3.5.1-2. SDCS and Flow Selection for Serial Line Configuration
To monitor a particular statistic about a flow, it is necessary to select the appropriate SDCS, the
operational mode and the flow out of the lower menu. Statistics may be refreshed according to the
selected value.

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
3.3.4.7.3.5.2 Statistics Monitoring
This frame shows the statistics about the selected flow. The processed packets and the lost packets
for each one of the inputs and outputs defined for the selected flow are shown.
Figure 3.3.4.7.3.5.2-1. Statistics Monitoring
It is possible to monitor data about the packets that have been queued due to a system overload, as it
is shown in the following table:
Table 3.3.4.7.3.5.2-1. Statistics Monitoring
COMMAND ACTION
STORED/DISCARD PACKETS
GFFR - Sent packets by the redundancy algorithm.
DFFR - Discard packets once passed the redundancy algorithm.
GFFT - Stored packets in the transmission queue.
MEAN TIMES
TMF - Mean time for the sent packets.
TMFFT - Mean waiting time in the sending queue for the sent packets.
TMP - Mean processing time for the sent packets.
The flow that is being shown on screen may be restarted by pressing the button “Reset Flow
Statistics”. Once the reset is done, the date and time are updated in the frame “Starting Date/Time”.

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
3.3.4.7.3.6 AST STATISTICS
Figure 3.3.4.7.3.6-1. ASTERIX Statistics
This tab shows the statistics associated to ASTERIX data sorted by ASTERIX category. Only the flows
with priority 1 and whose name is “ASTERIX” will be processed.
This frame allows selecting the SDCS whose ASTERIX statistics will be monitored.
Figure 3.3.4.7.3.6.1-1. SDCS Selection for LAN Architecture

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
3.3.4.7.3.6.2 ASTERIX Category selection
Using these pull-down lists, the ASTERIX category associated to the traffic, as well as the number of
scans, are selected; these parameters are used for the statistics calculation.
Figure 3.3.4.7.3.6.2-1. ASTERIX Categories
Available ASTERIX categories are:

 Category 1&2.
 Categories 38&48.
 Category 8.
 Category 10.
 Category 21.
 Category 17.
 Categories 19&20.
3.3.4.7.3.6.3 ASTERIX Statistics Monitoring
This frame shows the ASTERIX statistics associated to the categories that were selected in the
“ASTERIX categories” selection frame (See the previous section).
Figure 3.3.4.7.3.6.3-1. ASTERIX Statistics

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
These statistics are shown both scan by scan and each number of scans defined in “ASTERIX
categories” frame. (See the previous section). The data that are shown are:
 Mean: mean delay of the data in the calculation time.
th
 Percentile 99: 99 Percentile of the delay in the calculation time.
 Maximum: Maximum delay in the calculation time.
 Minimum: Minimum delay in the calculation time.
 Standard Deviation: Standard deviation associated to the delay in the calculation time.
 Nr. Samples: Amount of samples.
 Delay: Delay of the latest datum.
 AST Cat.: ASTERIX Category.
3.3.4.7.3.6.4 Thresholds Delays
This window allows configuring all the critical thresholds and degraded thresholds for the delay in the
ASTERIX data associated to all the categories. In the case the delays are over, these thresholds, the
alarms associated to the ASTERIX delays, will be activated in the general window using the following
colour criterion:
 Delays in green colour: ASTERIX data delay below the defined limits.
 Delays in orange colour: ASTERIX data delay in degraded area.
 Delays in red colour: ASTERIX data delay in critical area.
Figure 3.3.4.7.3.6.4-1. ASTERIX Alarms Thresholds

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
The configuration of these values should be done from SLG0 if possible (either for local SDCS or
remote SDCS, if these last are present). To carry on this configuration, the particular SDCS must be
selected.
To establish an appropriate configuration for these thresholds, the following items shall be taken into
account:
 The fields for every category must be configured between 0 and 10.000 ms (even in the unused
data categories). If any field is configured with “0 ms”, the associated box of the ASTERIX delay
for the particular SDCS will be shown in red colour.
 It is recommended to configure the maximum allowed value (10.000 ms) for the delays of the
local SDCS (both critical and degraded), as the misses in Ethernet connections are minimum and
insignificant.
 To determine the appropriate values either for the configuration of the critical threshold or the
degraded threshold of the remote SDCS, it will be necessary to perform an analysis of the mean
delays obtained in the ASTERIX Statistics tab. It is recommended to configure the degraded
threshold (alarm is shown in orange colour) with two times the mean delay (double), and to
configure the critical threshold (alarm is shown in red colour) with three times the mean delay
(triple).
After analyzing the results, user will decide the most adequate final configuration for the thresholds
values. Once that all the values are configured (both local SDCS and remote SDCS (if applicable) for
every category), user must press “Apply” button to make the changes effective.
After performing the configuration, it is recommended to restart both SLG0 and SLG1 in a sequential
way (SLG0 at first place and after this one has completely started, SLG1).
To assure the proper operation of the delay alarm, it is required for every SDCS to be synchronized
with NTP servers, both in local and remote positions.
3.3.4.7.3.7 SDCS VERSIONS
From this window, user can see the version installed in each SDCS:
Figure 3.3.4.7.3.7-1. SDCS Versions Controls and Indicators
Out of the whole group of controls and indicators available in the system, in this manual are described
some of the most significant ones, in user interfacing terms. For each one, physical and functional
descriptions are detailed (references to technical manuals are included when further information is
required).

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
4. SYSTEM OPERATION
4.1 INTRODUCTION
This section shows the operating instructions for the power-up, power-down, emergency stop and post
emergency power-up procedures.
It defines as well a series of procedures for the normal operation with the different modules comprising
the system: power up, initial configuration, etc.
4.2 CONTROLS AND INDICATORS
Out of the whole group of controls and indicators available in the system, in this manual are described
some of the most significant ones, in user interfacing terms. For each one, physical and functional
descriptions are detailed (references to technical manuals are included when further information is
required). For the controls not described in this document, a list containing all of them is included.
4.2.1 Indra PSR
4.2.1.1 Controls and Indicators of TXG
4.2.1.1.1 CONTROLS AND INDICATORS ON THE FRONT DOOR
 Power Input: 3 LEDs for the three phases. Yellow colour.

 Soft Failure: Unit Fault. Orange Colour.
 Hard Failure: Interlock, Blower Fault. Red Colour.
 Lamp Test: To check LEDs. Green button.
 Inhibit Transmission button: Inhibits transmission manually. Red button.
Figure 4.2.1.1.1-1. Indicators and Controls at the Door

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
4.2.1.1.2 INDICATORS OF TXCU
On the front panel:

 INTL: Interlock, on for the standby unit. Orange colour.
 ACT: Active Unit, on for the main unit. Green colour.
 PWR: Power indicator. Green colour.
Figure 4.2.1.1.2-1. TXCU Indicators
4.2.1.1.3 CONTROLS AND INDICATORS OF BPS
On the front panel:

 AC Input, DC Output OK indicators. Green colour.
 ON/OFF switch.
Figure 4.2.1.1.3-1. BPS Front View

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
4.2.1.1.4 Controls and Indicators of MVPS
On the front panel:

 AC OK, DC OK indicators. Green colour.
 PWR ON/OFF and ENABLE ON/OFF switches.
NOTICE
indicator will flash instead of going off. The supply is not producing DC voltage, but
Figure 4.2.1.1.4-1. MVPS Front View

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
4.2.1.2 Controls and Indicators of GRPG
4.2.1.2.1 CONTROLS AND INDICATORS ON THE FRONT DOOR
 Power Input: 3 LEDs for the three phases. Yellow colour.

 Soft Failure: Unit Fault. Orange Colour.
 Hard Failure: Unit Fault, Overtemperature. Red Colour.
 Lamp Test: To check LEDs. Green button.
Figure 4.2.1.2.1-1. Controls and Indicators of the GRPG
4.2.1.2.2 CONTROLS AND INDICATORS OF THE SDG
4.2.1.2.2.1 CONTROLS AND INDICATORS OF THE POWER SUPPLIES
On the front panel:

 Power OK: Indicates the presence of voltage at the output. Green colour.
 Power ON/OFF Switch. Red Colour.
Figure 4.2.1.2.2.1-1. Power Supplies Indicators

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
4.2.1.2.2.2 INDICATORS OF TSU
On the front panel of the TSU:

 RST: Reset. Red colour.
 FAIL: Fail. Red colour.
 ACT: On for the active TSU. Green colour.
 RSV: On for the standby TSU. Yellow colour.
Figure 4.2.1.2.2.2-1. TSU Indicators
4.2.1.2.2.3 INDICATORS OF SDCU
On the front panel of the SDCU:

 RST: Reset. Red Colour.
 SI4: Green colour.
 PWR: Indicates that all power supplies of the rack are correct. Green colour.
Figure 4.2.1.2.2.3-1. SDCU Indicators

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
4.2.1.2.2.4 CONTROLS AND INDICATORS OF AGSU
On the front panel of the AGSU:

 REMOTE/LOCAL: Switch and indicator (1).
 EPG selection: Switch and indicator (2).
 RXG selection: Switch and indicator (3).
 MWG selection: Switch and indicator (4).
 TSU selection: Switch and indicator (5).
Figure 4.2.1.2.2.4-1. AGSU Frontal Panel
See paragraph 4.3.6 for AGSU operation.
NOTICE
4.2.1.2.3 CONTROLS AND INDICATORS OF MWCG
4.2.1.2.3.1 CONTROLS AND INDICATORS OF THE POWER SUPPLIES
See paragraph 4.2.1.2.2.1.
4.2.1.2.3.2 INDICATORS OF MWCU
On the front panel of the active MWCU:

 FAIL: Indicates Unit failure. Red colour.
 SI2: Indicates the unit is the active one. Yellow colour. Flashing.
 COMA: EPGA read/write access. Yellow colour.

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
 COMB: EPGB read/write access. Yellow colour.

 ACT: STC curves generation. Green colour.
 PWR: Power OK. Green colour.
On the front panel of the standby MWCU:

 COMA: EPGA read/write access. Yellow colour.
 COMB: EPGB read/write access. Yellow colour.
 ACT: STC curves generation. Green colour.
 SI4: Indicates the unit is the standby one. Green colour. Flashing.
Figure 4.2.1.2.3.2-1. MWCU Indicators

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
4.2.1.2.4 CONTROLS AND INDICATORS OF MWPS
On the front panel of the MWPS:

 Enable switch: Enables/disables the output power.
 Power Switch: On/Off the power supply.
 Status indicators: Green colour for AC and DC OK.
Figure 4.2.1.2.4-1. MWPG Indicators and Controls
NOTICE
4.2.1.2.5 CONTROLS AND INDICATORS OF THE RXG
4.2.1.2.5.1 CONTROLS AND INDICATORS OF ERPS
On the front of the ERPS:

 AC OK: Green colour.
 DC OK: Green colour.
Figure 4.2.1.2.5.1-1. ERPS Indicators

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
4.2.1.2.5.2 CONTROLS AND INDICATORS OF RGCU
On the front panel of active RGCU:

 FAIL: Indicates unit failure. Red colour.
 SI1: Overtemperature indication. Red colour.
 SI2: Indicates active unit. Yellow colour. Flashing.
 ACT: STC curves generation active. Green colour.
On the front panel of standby RGCU:
 SI1: Overtemperature indication. Red colour.
 ACT: STC curves generation active. Green colour.
 SI3: Indicates standby unit. Green colour. Flashing.
Figure 4.2.1.2.5.2-1. RGCU Indicators

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
4.2.1.2.6 CONTROLS AND INDICATORS OF EPG
4.2.1.2.6.1 CONTROLS AND INDICATORS OF ERPS
See paragraph 4.2.1.2.5.1.
4.2.1.2.6.2 INDICATORS OF GPB
On the front panel of GPB:

 A, B, C, D: One for status of each processing node. Green colour.
Figure 4.2.1.2.6.2-1. GPB Indicators
4.2.1.2.6.3 INDICATORS OF SYNU
On the front panel of SYNU:

 FAIL: Unit failure. Red colour.
 VBA: Read/write access to the board through VME bus. Yellow colour.
 VB1: Interruption from VME bus. Yellow colour.
 VBE: Bus error generated. Yellow colour.
 ACT: Generating synchronism. Green colour.
Figure 4.2.1.2.6.3-1. SYNU Indicators

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
4.2.1.2.6.4 INDICATORS CBU
On the front panel of CBU:

 VBA: Read/write access through VME bus. Yellow colour.
 VBI: Interruption from VME bus. Yellow colour.
 VBE: Bus Error. Yellow colour.
 ACT: Message generation active. Green colour.
 SI3: Power OK. Green colour.
Figure 4.2.1.2.6.4-1. CBU Indicators
4.2.1.2.6.5 INDICATORS OF STALO
On the front panel of STALO:

 Tx OK: Output from STALO to TXGU level OK. Green colour.
 RxA OK: Output from STALO to RXG 1 (LOSDU) level OK. Green colour.
 RxB OK: Output from STALO to RXG 2 (LOSDU) level OK. Green colour.
Figure 4.2.1.2.6.5-1. STALO Indicators

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
4.2.1.2.6.6 CONTROLS AND INDICATORS OF COHO
On the front panel of COHO:

 LVL OK for LO2 Tx: Output from COHO to TXGU level OK. Green colour.
 LVL OK for LO2 Rx1: Output from COHO to RXG 1 (LOSDU) level OK. Green colour.
 LVL OK for LO2 Rx2: Output from COHO to RXG 2 (LOSDU) level OK. Green colour.
 LVL OK for CLK-G: Output from COHO to DSU level OK. Green colour.
 LVL OK for CLK-C: Output from COHO to DRU level OK. Green colour.
Figure 4.2.1.2.6.6-1. COHO Indicators

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
4.2.1.3 Controls and Indicators of DRCG/PTCP
Via the DRCG control panel, the status of the pedestal can be monitored and the motors can be
operated manually. Also, their operation can be interrupted in the event of a foreseeable emergency
situation.
As shown in the Figure 4.2.1.3-1, the DRCG control panel is composed of the elements included in
Table 4.2.1.3-1.
Figure 4.2.1.3-1. External View of DRCG

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
Table 4.2.1.3-1. List of Components of DRCG Front Panel
ID NAME DESCRIPTION
1 DS12 RESTARTED SYSTEM

2 S5 Control modes (OFF; MAINTENANCE; LOCAL; REMOTE)
3 DS8, DS9, DS10, DS11 Indicators for control modes (OFF; MAINTENANCE; LOCAL; REMOTE)
4 DS1 START UP WARNING
5 S11 Obstruction lights switch
6 S7 Speed selector
7 S8 Emergency button
8 DS2, DS3 ENCODER 1 ON, ENCODER 2 ON
9 S9 ON/OFF button for motor 1
10 DS4, DS5 Indicators for drive line 1 (MOTOR 1 ON, CLUTCH 1 ON)
11 DS6, DS7 Indicators for drive line 2 (MOTOR 2 ON, CLUTCH 2 ON)
13 DRV 1 Screen of motor controller 1
14 DRV2 Screen of motor controller 2
15 DS30 OBSTRUCTION LIGHTS status
Interlock indicators (MECHANICAL SAFETY INTERLOCK, INTERLOCK, CONTROL BOX
16 DS25, DS26, DS27, DS28, DS29
EMERGENCY STOP, PEDESTAL EMERGENCY STOP and PEDESTAL INTERLOCK
Status indicators for drive line 2 (MOTOR 2 OVERTEMP, MOTOR 2 OVERCURRENT,
17 DS21, DS22, DS23, DS24
MOTOR 2 DRIVING FAILURE and MOTOR 2 HEATER)
Status indicators for drive line 1 (MOTOR 1 OVERTEMP, MOTOR 1 OVERCURRENT,
18 DS17, DS18, DS19, DS20
MOTOR 1 DRIVING FAILURE and MOTOR 1 HEATER)
Oil level status indicators (SUMP OIL LEVEL, GEARBOX 1 OIL LEVEL and GEARBOX 2
19 DS16, DS31, DS32
OIL LEVEL)
24 V Power Supplies status indicators (DC POWER SUPPLY 1, DC POWER SUPPLY
20 DS13, DS14, DS15
and DC POWER SUPPLY FAILURE)
21 M1 Multimeter
22 S12 Lamp test
23 S1, S2 Encoders activation switches
24 S3, S4 Heaters activation switches

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
For the PTCP, that is the control panel installed in pedestal room for maintenance purposes, the
elements are shown in the Figure 4.2.1.3-2 and listed in Table 4.2.1.3-2.
Figure 4.2.1.3-2. External View of PTCP

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
Table 4.2.1.3-2. List of Components of PTCP Front Panel
ID NAME DESCRIPTION
1 S10 Lamp Test
2 S5, S6 Encoder activation switches
3 S1 Control Mode selector
4 DS1 PTCP ON indicator
5 S7, S8 Heaters activation switches
6 DS2 START UP WARNING
7 S9 Obstruction lights activation switch
8 S2 Emergency button from PTCP
9 DS13 SUMP OIL LEVEL indicator
10 DS7 Interlock indicator
11 DS8, DS9 Encoder 1 ON, and Encoder 2 ON indicators
12 DS10 Obstruction lights ON indicator
13 DS5, DS6 Motor 1 ON, and Clutch 1 On indicators
16 DS3, DS4 Motor 1 ON, and Clutch 1 On indicators
4.2.2 Other Components Not Included in this Manual
For controls and indicators of COTS equipment, the user should consult the corresponding manual.

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
4.3 OPERATING PROCEDURES
4.3.1 General Safety Conditions
WARNING
Safety harness required when climbing ladder and when

working in height.
WARNING
Radiation hazard. Do not open the device.

This unit contains a radioactive isotope (Tritium, H3 or T) in
less than 1%.
3
The system includes a unit that contains a radioactive isotope (Tritium, H or T) in less than 1%. The
tube is an exempt device and normal handling will present no radiation problems. For more
information see APPENDIX A RECEIVER PROTECTOR SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
CAUTION
Mechanical safety interlocks must be used when required and

observed in order to prevent accidents.
CAUTION
To ensure safety and avoid mechanical accidents, the following instructions should
be followed:
 Motion radar areas must be clear and well delimited.
 Motion Radar areas must never be accessed during antenna turning.
NOTICE

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
4.3.2 User Access to the Control and Monitoring System
Task 4.3.2-1. User Access to the Control and Monitoring System
Tools and Support Equipments
Nomenclature Identification Quantity
N/A. N/A. N/A.
Safety Conditions
N/A.
Procedure
Previous Conditions:
1) Radar System must have been powered up following procedure described in paragraph 4.3.3. After that, an automatic starting
process is initiated.
Procedure:
User can handle the main Radar functionalities through the UCS by carrying out the following procedure:
2) Enter the interrogator application by clicking MSSR box on SLG main screen.
3) Select the Control mode according to user's location:
a) Click LB over Control button.
Control Button
b) For SLG: Select Local.
c) For SRG: "Control Mode: Remote" is required for acquiring profile in SRG. This can be done in two ways:
 Manually: Change from Local to Remote on SLG.
 Automatically: After a period of time without activity in the SLG.
NOTE: Changing Control Mode from Local to Remote on SRG is not allowed.
NOTE: Changing the control mode provokes that the current user loses the profile if there is any user logged in.
4) Log in:
a) Click LB over PROFILE button.
UCS Top bar

b) An user profile window is shown and the "user" and "password" fields are requested.
 "Profile 0" button is used to release any user profile that is currently logged in, setting automatically profile 0, which
allows just monitoring the system. In case the SLG is inactive during a certain period of time, the profile is switched to
the profile 0 automatically.
 A higher profile provides user with higher permissions, up to profile 5, which has no restrictions.
 User must specify the period of time while the administrator profile is going to be requested, being possible to get it for
just 1 minute or for up to 99 hours. (This is an optional functionality).
 After filling in the profile user box with valid data, click on “Apply” and the permissions will be provided.
 To release the profile, pressing the PROFILE 0 button the profile is automatically set to supervision level, allowing just
monitoring the system. Other possibility is to overpass the time limit specified (if this function is available); in that
moment the profile is automatically released.

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
Task 4.3.2-1. User Access to the Control and Monitoring System
 This can be done from either from local or remote positions in the CMS system; in both cases, the login request is
added to the local stations applications logs.
User Profile Window with Period Time
User Profile Window without Period Time

 If user tries to log in with a non adequate "Control mode" according to its location, the system will display an error
window.
 If user tries to log in while other user is already logged in, the system will display an error windows.
Final State
User achieves the profile level selected and controlling operations get available for user customization. This situation will last till the period
selected is over, or until user releases profile in the indicated way.

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
4.3.3 System Power Up
Task 4.3.3-1. System Power Up
N/A. N/A. N/A.
Safety Conditions
CAUTION
Controls initial position must be ensured before to proceed to

power up procedure.
CAUTION
Before starting the power up procedure, it should be checked

that the Radar is OFF and the main general switch is in the OFF
position.
Procedure
The initial position of controls is described in the table below:
EQUIPMENT ELEMENT INITIAL POSITION OBSERVATIONS
AGSU Mode Switch REMOTE 4.3.6

Inside DRCG Circuit breakers All in ON
Emergency button DRCG/PTCP Unlocked
Procedure:
To power up the system, the following sequence should be performed:

1) Power up the Indra PSR. See section 4.3.3.1.
2) If there were any UPS installed, ensure that UPS System is powered up.
3) Power up the antenna drive system. See section 4.3.3.3.
4) Check that the antenna is turning.
5) Power up the Control and Monitoring System workstations (SLGs). See section 4.3.3.2.
6) Power up the SDCS in order to send radar data to control centre and control and monitoring data to SRG (if applicable). See section
section 4.3.3.4.
Final State
Complete System will be powered up.

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
4.3.3.1 Indra PSR Power Up
Table 4.3.3.1-1. Indra PSR Power Up Procedure
N/A. N/A. N/A.
Safety Conditions
DANGER
High voltage present in the system.
Procedure
Indra PSR powered down.
Procedure:
To activate the Indra PSR, the steps described below shall be followed:
1) Switch on the Main power circuit-breaker in GRPG and TXG.
2) Switch on all the other circuit-breakers in GRPG and TXG.
3) Verify in the CMS that the system is in Operative state without any alarm or failure.
Final State
Indra PSR will be powered up.

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
4.3.3.2 CMS Power Up Procedure
Table 4.3.3.2-1. CMS Power Up Procedure
N/A. N/A. N/A.
Safety Conditions
NOTICE
Every SLG and SRG are HP workstations, Linux version CentOS 5.2, and the
procedures to power up all of them are identical for both kinds of workstations.
CAUTION
Do not perform the SLG Power Up procedure in all workstations simultaneously.

This may cause the databases are not properly synchronized.
Procedure
CMS powered down.
Procedure:
To activate the CMS system, follow the sequence indicated below:

1) Press the Power ON Button located in the front panel of the PC. The workstation automatically starts up all SW applications. This
process takes some minutes and it is recommended not to take any action while the applications are starting.
2) After power-up sequence, the Main Application Screen will appear on the monitor, colouring each element according to its particular
state.
3) If several SLG's are being used simultaneously, take into account that all of them need to be connected to the Local Network prior to
power-up. The SLG that acts as "master" (the one which contains the valid data base) must be powered up 30 seconds before the
others (manually), to ensure the data base is synchronized properly.
Final State
CMS will be powered up.

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
4.3.3.3 Antenna Drive System Power Up
Table 4.3.3.3-1. Antenna Drive System Power Up
N/A. N/A. N/A.
Safety Conditions
DANGER
Procedure
 Antenna Drive System Motors powered down.

 Mode Selector : LOCAL. (In the Pedestal Control box).
 READY SYSTEM lamp, in the Pedestal Control box, switched ON.
Procedure:
1) If the “RESTARTED SYSTEM” lamp is OFF, the mode selector must be previously placed in the position “OFF” and return to
"LOCAL" or "MAINTENANCE" position later. Once the “RESTARTED SYSTEM” lamp is ON, the drive system is controlled from the
door of the DRCG (LOCAL mode) or PTCP (MAINTENANCE mode). By means of the buttons set in the door, it is possible to give the
order to start or stop the transmission line 1, the transmission line 2, or both lines.
2) Check that interlock lamps are disabled (see paragraph 4.2.1.3).
The following paragraphs describe the different start procedures afforded.
3) Start Motor 1 or Motor 2: In this operation mode, only one motor is running. This operates independently and it receives its speed
by CAN communication from the PLC.
START MOTOR
RESTARTED START UP
SYSTEM MOTOR OFF WARNING MOTOR ON
Start Sequences with One Motor

4) Start motor 1 and motor 2 simultaneously: In this operation mode, the two motors are operative and they are switched ON
simultaneously. This is the usual way of switching motors. In this case inverter 1 operates as master and inverter 2 as slave. Thus,
only inverter 1 receives the speed reference by CAN communication from the PLC. Inverter 2 receives from the PLC that inverter 1 is
operating, and so it operates with the torque reference from inverter 1 instead of the speed reference from PLC. Inverter 2
contributes with half of the arranged torque, splitting the charge between the two motors. The start sequence is shown in the
following figure.

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
Table 4.3.3.3-1. Antenna Drive System Power Up
START MOTOR 1
MOTOR 1 OFF MOTOR 1 ON
RESTARTED
START UP
SYSTEM
WARNING
START MOTOR 2
MOTOR 2 OFF MOTOR 2 ON
Start Sequences with Two Motors

5) Start motor 1 and Start motor 2 sequentially: In this switching mode, both motors are switched off and they are switched ON one
after the other. Inverter of the first motor switched on operates alone, and works with the speed reference that receives by CAN
communication from PLC. When the second motor operation is activated, this motor has a flying start stabilizing with the output
frequency of the other motor. When both motors are operating, inverter 1 behaves as master and inverter 2 behaves as slave. Next
figure shows the start and stop sequences for this mode.
Start Motor 1 and Start Motor 2 Sequentially
Final State
After any of these procedures the antenna drive system should start turning.
NOTICE
To allow controlling the pedestal from the CMS, the mode selector must be set to
REMOTE position.

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
4.3.3.4 SDCS Power Up Procedure
Table 4.3.3.4-1. SDCS Power Up Procedure
N/A. N/A. N/A.
Safety Conditions
N/A.
Procedure
SDCS powered down.
Procedure:
1) Switching on is performed using the power ON/OFF switch located on the front panel of each SDCS device.
SDCS Power Button

2) After powering on SDCS device, its starting up can take until two minutes.
Final State
SDCS will be powered up.

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
6
4.3.3.5 LAN Switches Power Up Procedure
Table 4.3.3.5-1. LAN Switches Power Up Procedure
N/A. N/A. N/A.
Safety Conditions
DANGER
NOTICE
These Switches do not have Main Power switch.
Procedure
LAN switches powered down.
Procedure:
1) Switch-ON: Locate the Main power cord and connect it to the Main socket.
Power Connector
Switch Rear View
Final State
LAN Switches will be powered up.
6 For site switches, not for internal PSR switches.

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
4.3.4 System Power Down
Task 4.3.4-1. System Power Down
N/A. N/A. N/A.
Safety Conditions
N/A.
Procedure
Complete System powered up.
Procedure:
Follow the sequence below to perform a system power down:

1) From the Control and Monitoring System, disable the transmission (see 3.3.4.1.2.1.1) and perform a SW power down as described in
paragraph 4.3.4.2.
2) Ensure that the SLG units are powered down.
3) Power down the Indra PSR. See section 4.3.4.1.
4) Power down the Antenna Drive System. See section 4.3.4.4.
5) If there were any UPS installed, power down UPS System.
6) Power down the SDCSs. See section 4.3.4.5.
Final State
Complete System will be powered down.

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
4.3.4.1 Indra PSR Power Down
Table 4.3.4.1-1. Indra PSR Power Down procedure
N/A. N/A. N/A.
Safety Conditions
N/A.
Procedure
Indra PSR powered up.
Procedure:
To deactivate the Indra PSR, the steps described below must be followed:
1) Open DKA. In the screen, select System -> Shutdown. Once the computer is off, press the switch off button at the front if needed.
This step must be performed in both channels.
2) Shutdown the Main circuit breaker (Main Power) at the front of the TXG.
3) Shut down every group circuit breakers at the front of the GRPG (SDG, MWCG/MWPG, SWR 1, SWR 2, DKA/CPC 1, DKA/CPC 2,
RXG 1, RXG 2, EPG 1, EPG 2).
4) Shut down the main circuit breaker (Main power 1 and Main Power 2) at the front of each GRPG channel.
Final State
Interrogator System will be powered down.

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
4.3.4.2 CMS Power Down Procedure
Table 4.3.4.2-1. CMS Power Down procedure
N/A. N/A. N/A.
Safety Conditions
NOTICE
procedures to power down all of them are identical for both kinds of workstations.
Procedure
CMS powered up.
Procedure:
There are two ways to shut down the CMS system:

1) Controlled Shut down
 User must select in the "Last Event area" within the Top bar, (see section 3.2.1.5) the SHUTDOWN option from the SLG/SRG
pull-down menu.
Top Bar LB Menu

 A green window asking user for confirmation about the shutdown of the station will appear.
Shutdown Window
 If user selects 'y', the station begins the shutdown procedure.
 If user selects 'n', the shutdown process is aborted.
2) Emergency Shutdown:
 This consists of shutting down the station pressing the power switch that is located in the front part of the equipment until the
station's power LED goes off.
 Although equipment is protected from this shut down method, it is not recommended except for emergency cases.
Final State
CMS will be powered down.

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
4.3.4.3 CMS Reboot Procedure
Table 4.3.4.3-1. CMS Reboot Procedure
N/A. N/A. N/A.
Safety Conditions
NOTICE
procedures to power down all of them are identical for both kinds of workstations.
CAUTION
Do not perform the SLG Reboot procedure in all workstations simultaneously.
This may cause the databases are not properly synchronized.
Procedure
CMS powered up.
Procedure:
This procedure is used to restart the station without shutting them down.
 User must select in the "Last Event area" within the Top bar (see section 3.2.1.5) the REBOOT option from the SLG/SRG pull-down
menu.
Top Bar LB Menu

 A green window asking the user for confirmation about the rebooting process of the station will appear.
Reboot Window
 If user selects 'y', the station begins the rebooting process.
 If user selects 'n', the reboot process is aborted.
Final State
CMS will get restarted.

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
4.3.4.4 Antenna Drive System Power Down
Table 4.3.4.4-1. Antenna Drive System Power Down
N/A. N/A. N/A.
Safety Conditions
DANGER
Procedure
Antenna Drive System Motors powered up.
Procedure:
The different stop procedures afforded are detailed in the following paragraphs.
 Stop motor 1 or motor 2: In this operation mode, only one motor is running. This operates independently and it receives its speed
by CAN communication from the PLC.
RESTARTED
MOTOR ON MOTOR OFF
SYSTEM
STOP MOTOR
Stop Sequences with One Motor

 Stop motor 1 and motor 2 simultaneously: In this operation mode, the two motors are operative, and they are switched OFF
simultaneously. This is the normal way of switching. In this case inverter 1 operates as master and inverter 2 as slave. Thus, only
inverter 1 receives the speed reference by CAN communication from the PLC. Inverter 2 receives from the PLC that inverter 1 is
operating, and so it operates with the torque reference from the inverter 1 instead of the speed reference from PLC. Inverter 2
contributes with half of the arranged torque, splitting the charge between the two motors.
The stop sequence is shown in the following figure.

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
Table 4.3.4.4-1. Antenna Drive System Power Down
MOTOR 1 ON MOTOR 1 OFF
RESTARTED
SYSTEM
STOP MOTOR 1
STOP MOTOR 2
Stop Sequences with Two Motors

 Stop motor 1 and Stop motor 2 sequentially: In this switching mode, both motors are operative, and they are switched OFF one
after the other. This procedure is applicable during maintenance, when it is requested to stop one of the motors maintaining the
other one operative. The inverter that operates alone works with the speed reference that receives by CAN communication from
PLC. The next figure show the stop sequence for this mode.
RESTARTED
MOTOR 2 OFF
SYSTEM
MOTOR 2 ON MOTOR 2 ON
STOP MOTOR 1 STOP MOTOR 2
Stop Motor 1 and Stop Motor 2 Sequentially
Final State
Antenna Drive System Motors powered down.

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
4.3.4.5 SDCS Power Down Procedure
Table 4.3.4.5-1. SDCS Power Down procedure
N/A. N/A. N/A.
Safety Conditions
DANGER
Procedure
SDCS powered up.
Procedure:
1) Switching off is performed using the power ON/OFF switch located on the front panel of each SDCS device.
SDCS Power Button
Final State
SDCS will be powered down.

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
4.3.4.6 Initial configuration for LAN Switches
Task 4.3.4.6-1. Initial Configuration for LAN Switches
N/A. N/A. N/A.
Safety Conditions
N/A.
Procedure
LAN Switch must be powered on.
Procedure:
1) Using an Ethernet standard cable, connect any port of the switch to a PC.
2) Change the IP address of your PC to:
 IP address: 192.168.1.XXX (XXX from 2 to 24).
 Netmask: 255.255.255.0.
3) Open a web browser and introduce the previous IP: http://IP address.
4) In the Configuration menu, select the option “Basic Setting/ IP Setup” and configure it as follows (static IP address):
 IP Address: 214.25.250.90 (LAN1) / 214.25.249.90 (LAN2).
 IP Subnet Mask: 255.255.255.0.
 Default Gateway: 0.0.0.0.
5) Then, configure the IP of the PC with the next values:
 IP Address: 214.25.250.xxx (xxx should have a value different from the used ones).
 Netmask: 255.255.255.0.
 Enter the Configuration menu again, following the previous steps, and press “Save” in the “Basic Setting/ IP Setup” menu.
6) Reboot the Switch, unplugging and plugging again the power cord.
Final State
LAN Switch is configured and provides communication with the rest of elements by LAN.

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
7
4.3.4.7 LAN Switches Power Down Procedure
Table 4.3.4.7-1. LAN Switches Power Down Procedure
N/A. N/A. N/A.
Safety Conditions
DANGER
NOTICE
These Switches do not have Mains switch.
Procedure
LAN switches powered up.
Procedure:
1) Switch-OFF: Locate the Main power cord and disconnect it from the Main socket.
Power Connector
Switch Rear View
Final State
LAN Switches will be powered down.

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
4.3.5 Emergency Stop
Task 4.3.5-1. Emergency Stop
N/A. N/A. N/A.
Safety Conditions
CAUTION
An emergency stop shall be performed only when any dangerous situation could
damage site personnel and/or in case of critical failures in Radar System or some of
its equipment
NOTICE
After emergency procedure activation, in order to allow System start, is necessary to

return every emergency switch that has been activated to Standby position and after
that perform starting. Otherwise, it will not possible System start.
Procedure
The DRCG-PTCP system has two emergency stop systems:

 DRCG emergency button.
 PTCP emergency button.
DRCG and PTCP

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
Task 4.3.5-1. Emergency Stop
The figure below shows an example of Emergency Switch status:
Emergency Switch Shape and Status
Procedure:
After the Emergency Stop:

To restart the Radar after an emergency stop, user must follow the steps below:
1) Solve the problem that caused the use of the emergency stop.
2) Unlock the push-button interlock mechanism (the system will remain locked).
3) Turn the key of the DRCG selector to OFF position (the system will reboot, but it will not start in the OFF position).
4) Turn the key to select the desired control mode (local, remote or maintenance).
5) Start the system according to the procedure described in section 4.3.3.3.
Final State
The antenna is operating normally.

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
4.3.6 Signal Distribution Group (SDG) Operation
Tabla 4.3.6-1. SDG Operation
N/A. N/A. N/A.
Safety Conditions
N/A
Procedure
The SDG unit is responsible for performing switching functions between different groups (contains the information of the active
group/board), both for signal and control purposes. It establishes the signal distribution to the active group, selected by the operator or due
to a fault. SDG receives the ACP/ARP signals from encoders (TSU) and sends them to the EPG and to the Secondary Radar.
The selection of the active group is done by means of two units in the system: Signal Distribution Control Unit (SDCU) and Active Group
Selection Unit (AGSU).
Procedure:
The active group selection can be carried out in two different ways: Local, by means of the AGSU, or Remote, by means of the CMS. The
kind of control (local or remote) is indicated by means of the green LEDs on the AGSU Front Panel.
NOTICE
1) REMOTE CONTROL: When Control switch (1) is placed in Remote position (normal operational mode), the active group is selected
from the CMS through the SDCU Unit. In this position, the rest of the control switches in the AGSU front panel do not cause any
action in the system.
2) LOCAL CONTROL: When Control switch (1) is placed in Local position, the active chain selection is performed by means of the
switches in the AGSU Front panel. Each switch selects group 1 or 2 as the active one. The different switches are:
 Switch 2: EPG 1 or 2 selection.
 Switch 3: RXG 1 or 2 selection.
 Switch 4: MWG 1 or 2 selection.
 Switch 5: TSU 1 or 2 selection.
AGSU Front Panel

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
Tabla 4.3.6-1. SDG Operation
Final State
The procedure allows the user to control the active chain of the system.
NOTICE
To allow controlling the active chain from the CMS, the Control Switch (1) must be set
to REMOTE position.

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
4.4 MANAGEMENT PROCEDURES
4.4.1 Adding a New User
Task 4.4.1-1. Adding a New User
N/A. N/A. N/A.
Safety Conditions
N/A.
Procedure
CMS system switched on.
Procedure:
The steps to create a new user is as follow:

 Access to Configurator application (see section 3.3.4.5).
 Get profile 4 or 5 in Configurator application of SLG/SRG (see section 3.3.4.5).
 In General Tab, click New button in User Management area (see section 3.3.4.5.1.3).
New User
NOTICE

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
Task 4.4.1-1. Adding a New User
Fill in the following data:

 User.
 Password (optionally, the password has to comply with the complexity requirements defined in 3.3.3. If not, a warning message will
appear).
 Profile (between 1 and 5).
 Application to access (Only for SLG). There is an application for each subsystem:
 UCS_Radar: Access to Mode S Interrogator.
 PSR: Access to primary radar if applicable.
 Expiration date (optional): Automatically filled to the current date plus 3 months. It cannot be modified.
 Lock Status (optional)
 Complexity of the password, Expiration date and Lock status are an optional set.
 Click on Accept button.
NOTICE
An user can access any subsystem application in read-only mode with profile 0, but it
is required the appropriate profile to customize any parameter.
If the password entered doesn't comply with the complexity requirement, the system will warn about that*:
Password Complexity warning

* Only if complexity requirement in the password is available
Final State
The user is added correctly to the system data base.

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
4.4.2 Removing a Registered User
Task 4.4.2-1. Removing a Registered User
N/A. N/A. N/A.
Safety Conditions
N/A.
Procedure
CMS system switched on with one user registered in the data base at least.
Procedure:
The steps to remove an user are as follow:

 In General Tab, choose the user to be erased in the User Management area and select Delete button (see section 3.3.4.5.1.3)*.
Delete User
*Expiration date and Locked status are optional and they only appear if this functionality is available.
NOTICE
To confirm the process, press "Yes" and the user will be deleted.
Final State
The user is deleted correctly from the system data base.

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
4.4.3 Changing the Properties of a Registered User
Task 4.4.3-1. Changing the Properties of a Registered User
N/A. N/A. N/A.
Safety Conditions
N/A.
Procedure
CMS system switched on with one user registered in the data base at least.
Procedure:
The steps to change the properties of an user are as follow:

 In General Tab, choose the user to be modified in the User Management area and select Modify button (see section 3.3.4.5.1.3)*.
Modify User
*Expiration date and Locked status are optional and they only appear if this functionality is available.
NOTICE
Customization of one o more of the following items is available now:

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
Task 4.4.3-1. Changing the Properties of a Registered User
 User.
 Password (optionally, the password has to comply with the complexity requirements defined in 3.3.3. If not, a warning message will appear).
 Profile (between 1 and 5).
 Application to access. There is an application for each subsystem:
 UCS_Radar: Access to Mode S Interrogator.
 PSR: Access to primary radar if applicable.
 Expiration date (optional): Automatically filled to the current date plus 3 months. It cannot be modified.
 Lock Status (optional)
 Complexity of the password, Expiration date and Lock status are an optional set.
 Click on Accept button.
Modified User
If the password entered doesn't comply with the complexity requirements, the system will warn about that*.
Password Complexity warning

* Only if complexity requirement in the password is available
Final State
The user is modified correctly in the system data base.

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
4.4.4 Unlocking User
Task 4.4.4-1. Unlocking User
N/A. N/A. N/A.
Safety Conditions
N/A.
Procedure
1) Complexity of password, expiration date and locking user by login attempts functionalities should be enabled.
2) There is a locked user.
Users can be locked by the following reasons:
 An administrator of the system (Profile 4 or 5 of Configurator application) set the lock status to "Yes".
 More than 5 wrong attempts of entering the password.
 Expiration of the date of the password.
Procedure:
The steps that a system administrator should carry on to unlock an user are described below:
1) If the user is locked due to expiration date, the administrator have to change the password. The new expiration date will be, by
default, 3 months later since the date of change.
2) If the user is locked due to number of wrong attempts of enter the password, the administrator have to change the lock status. If the
password is changed, the user is also unlocked.
To change the password or unlock the user , see section 4.4.4.
Final State
The user is unlocked.

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
4.4.5 Report Generation (Alarms and User Actions)
Task 4.4.5-1. Report Generation (Alarms and User Actions)
N/A. N/A. N/A.
Safety Conditions
N/A.
Procedure
CMS system switched on.
Procedure:
1) Open the Reports Manager Application and press "New" button to create a new report (see Figure 3.3.4.6-14).
2) Acquire administrator profile.
3) Configure the report with the expected data and generate the report. Section 3.3.4.6 can be used as a guide.
Final State
The CMS remains operative and the report is generated.

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
4.4.6 Basic System Configuration Procedure
4.4.6.1 Antenna and Pedestal Group Configuration in Maintenance Mode
Task 4.4.6.1-1. Antenna and Pedestal Group Configuration in Maintenance Mode
N/A. N/A. N/A.
Safety Conditions
N/A.
Procedure
This procedure must be followed in certain maintenance tasks, where specified. It is focused in maintenance operations performed around
the Antenna and Pedestal Group. Some maintenance tasks do not require a complete power down of the System so, in these cases, to
avoid a larger power down and a subsequent power up, this procedure that permits to perform preventive or corrective works, must be
used.
Maintenance mode guarantees safety during maintenance activities over Pedestal, blocking rotation of antenna and disabling transmission
while turning is stopped.
Procedure:
To reach APG configuration in maintenance mode, follow these steps:

1) Deactivate radar transmission as described in paragraph 3.3.4.1.2.1.1.
2) By means of “MODE SELECTOR”, select “MAINTENANCE” position in DRCG panel. Take the key and put it into the PTCP if APG
control is needed from the motor room.
3) Turn off both motors (see section 4.3.4.4). As an additional option, user can also power off the antenna by means of the Emergency
Push-Button that is located in antenna drive system control box (see section 4.3.5).
4) Move the locking mechanism (see 2.2.2.6) so that the antenna rotation is blocked.
After this procedure, maintenance activities can be carried out in a safe environment. When these activities are finished, it is necessary to
set the radar to normal operational configuration again.
To return the radar to operational configuration from maintenance configuration, follow these steps:
1) Move the locking mechanism again to the original position.
2) Place the control key again in the DRCG and select "LOCAL" to allow the antenna turning.
3) Turn on both motors (see section 4.3.3.3). Additionally, Power on the antenna from the antenna drive system control box with the
Emergency Push-button (see section 4.3.5).
4) Activate the radar transmission, see section 3.3.4.1.2.1.1.
After this procedure, the radar is in its normal operational configuration again.
Before leaving the site, select "REMOTE" in the "MODE SELECTOR" in the DRCG to allow control from SLG/SRG.
Final State
The radar system acquires Maintenance/Operational mode.

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
4.4.6.2 Initial Configuration for LAN Switches
Task 4.4.6.2-1. Initial Configuration for LAN Switches 8
N/A. N/A. N/A.
Safety Conditions
N/A.
Procedure
LAN Switch must be powered on.
Procedure:
1) Using an Ethernet standard cable, connect any port of the switch to a PC.
2) Change the IP address of your PC to:
 IP address: 192.168.1.XXX (XXX from 2 to 24).
 Netmask: 255.255.255.0.
3) Open a web browser and introduce the previous IP: http://IP address.
4) In the Configuration menu, select the option “Basic Setting/ IP Setup” and configure it as follows (static IP address):
 IP Address: 214.25.250.90 (LAN1) / 214.25.249.90 (LAN2).
 IP Subnet Mask: 255.255.255.0.
 Default Gateway: 0.0.0.0.
5) Then, configure the IP of the PC with the next values:
 IP Address: 214.25.250.xxx (xxx should have a value different from the used ones).
 Netmask: 255.255.255.0.
 Enter the Configuration menu again, following the previous steps, and press “Save” in the “Basic Setting/ IP Setup” menu.
6) Reboot the Switch, unplugging and plugging again the power cord.
Final State
LAN Switch is configured and provides communication with the rest of elements by LAN.

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
4.4.6.3 Configuration Via USB of the SDCS Modules
Task 4.4.6.3-1. Configuration via USB of the SDCS Modules
N/A. N/A. N/A.
Safety Conditions
N/A.
Procedure
SDCS Modules not configured.
Procedure:
SDCS Module Configuration Via USB

If the new device is not already configured, it can be done from either USB memory or SLG device.
The loading process of the device configuration through the USB Memory is the following one:
1) Power up the Process Unit.
2) Connect the USB memory in any available USB port of the Processing Unit.
3) The device configuration will be loaded automatically, and after this, it will start to work normally.
4) Remove the USB memory.
Each one of the two SDCS devices has its own settings, A or B. Since they have different configuration, and each configuration is inside
one particular USB drive, it is necessary to be careful of which memory is connected.
Final State
SDCS are configured.

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
5. QUICK INDEX PROCEDURES
The following table contains a list with the main procedures sorted by subsystem in order to access
them quickly.
Table 5-1. Procedure List
PROCEDURE SUBSYSTEM SECTION
System Power Up General System 4.3.3
System Shutdown General System 4.3.4
Pedestal Motors Power Up Antenna Drive System 4.3.3.3
Pedestal Motors Power Down Antenna Drive System 4.3.4.4
Emergency Stop Antenna Drive System 4.3.5
APG configuration in Maintenance Mode Antenna Drive System 4.4.6.1
Indra PSR Power Up Indra PSR 4.3.3.1
Indra PSR Shutdown Indra PSR 4.3.4.1
CMS Power Up CMS 4.3.3.2
CMS Shutdown CMS 4.3.4.2
CMS Reboot CMS 4.3.4.3
User Access CMS 4.3.2
Adding New User CMS 4.4.1
Removing Registered User CMS 4.4.2
Changing Properties of a Registered User CMS 4.4.3
Unlocking User CMS 4.4.4
Report Generation CMS 4.4.5
LAN Switches Power Up Radar Communication System 4.3.4.7
LAN Switches Power Down Radar Communication System 4.3.4.7
SDCS Power Up Radar Communication System 4.3.3.4
SDCS Power Down Radar Communication System 4.3.4.5
Initial Configuration for LAN Switches Radar Communication System 4.3.4.6
Configuration via USB of the SDCS Radar Communication System 4.4.6.3

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
A. APPENDIX A
RECEIVER PROTECTOR SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
Doc.Nº: 0066500000031MA00 Appendix A

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
A. RECEIVER PROTECTOR SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
Appendix A Doc.Nº: 0066500000031MA00

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR

Date: 29/04/2016
UM
Indra PSR
"The last page of the document"

Date: 29/04/2016

Primary Surveillance 2D S Band Radar (Indra PSR) PDF

Загружено:

Сведения о документе

Оригинальное название

Авторское право

Доступные форматы

Поделиться этим документом

Поделиться или встроить документ

Параметры публикации

Этот документ был вам полезен?

Это неприемлемый материал?

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

Primary Surveillance 2D S Band Radar (Indra PSR) PDF

Загружено:

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

UM

Name Signature Date Responsibility

Digitally signed by [F]

Jesús Lozano Pacios Digitally signed by [F] Jesús Lozano Pacios

RECORD OF EDITIONS AND PAGE REVISIONS

Chapter Edit./Rev. Chapter Edit./Rev. Chapter Edit./Rev. Chapter Edit./Rev.

i-xxviii D/0 5 D/0

DOCUMENT CHANGES RECORD

Edit./Rev. Date Chapters Reason for Change

A/0 15/05/2014 1-5, A New Document

Copy Nº. Company / Organization Department Name and Surname

Chapter Description Page

1. INTRODUCTION .......................................................................................................................... 1-1

Doc.Nº: 0066500000031MA00 III

Chapter Description Page

Chapter Description Page

Chapter Description Page

Chapter Description Page

Doc.Nº: 0066500000031MA00 VII

Chapter Description Page

VIII Doc.Nº: 0066500000031MA00

Chapter Description Page

Chapter Description Page

Chapter Description Page

Chapter Description Page

XII Doc.Nº: 0066500000031MA00

Chapter Description Page

A. RECEIVER PROTECTOR SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS ................................................................ A-2

No se encontraron elementos de tabla de contenido.

Doc.Nº: 0066500000031MA00 XIII

Figure 2.2.1-1. APG Diagram ................................................................................................................................ 2-2

XIV Doc.Nº: 0066500000031MA00

XVI Doc.Nº: 0066500000031MA00

Doc.Nº: 0066500000031MA00 XVII

XVIII Doc.Nº: 0066500000031MA00

Doc.Nº: 0066500000031MA00 XIX

Doc.Nº: 0066500000031MA00 XXI

XXII Doc.Nº: 0066500000031MA00

Doc.Nº: 0066500000031MA00 XXIII

XXIV Doc.Nº: 0066500000031MA00

Doc.Nº: 0066500000031MA00 XXV

Table 1.7.2-1. Reference Documents ................................................................................................................... 1-5

XXVI Doc.Nº: 0066500000031MA00

Doc.Nº: 0066500000031MA00 XXVII

"This page intentionally left blank"

XXVIII Doc.Nº: 0066500000031MA00

Document Name: User Manual.

ACRO Program: N/A.

Project Name: N/A.

ACRO Project N/A.

CM Baseline Project: N/A.

System Name: Indra Primary Surveillance 2D S Band Radar.

Document Type: UM.

Prepared by the Dept. of: System Engineering (SE).

Document Version: D/0.

Doc.Nº: 0066500000031MA00 Chapter 1

1.3 DOCUMENT OVERVIEW

The document is composed of five chapters:

Chapter 1 Doc.Nº: 0066500000031MA00

1.4 TERMINOLOGY AND CONVENTIONS

1.4.1 Meaning of Precautionary Statements

Safety harness required when climbing ladder and when

Mechanical safety interlocks must be used when required and